Está en la página 1de 351

CAT102 Cover 8.

5x11 12/5/00 2:40 PM Page 2

Alarm Event Recording

Distributed Monitoring

Machine Monitoring

Power Quality

Calibrators

Recorders

Transducers

Signal Conditioning

Distribution Monitoring

Product Catalog102
CONTINUE


AMETEK
Contents
1.Services
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 SC-4300 L/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Sales & Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Training & Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Parts & Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Service Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
SC-4300R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
SC-4326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
SC-4372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
SC-2302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
1
Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 SC-4300M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
ET-1200L/U & ET-1202L/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
2.Alarm and Event Recording ET-1205 & ET-1208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 ET-1214 & ET-1218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
AN-3100C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 ET-1215 & ET-1219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29
AN-5131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 ET-1228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
AN-6150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33 ET-1275 & ET-1278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
AN-3196B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37 ET-1200 Ordering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
SM-100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 SC-1300 & SC-1302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.39
AN-6100R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 SC-1300L & SC-1300U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
ISM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 SC-1300R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
DMS-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 SC-1372 & SC-1374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
RiSCue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61 SC-1326 & SC-1326W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
SC-1300 Specialty Transmitters
3.Machine Monitoring & Computational Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 SC-1350/1364/1380/1382/1390/1396 . . . . 7.47
VT-3360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 SC-1320/1324/1330/1352/1354/1356/
TM-2480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 1358/1362/1398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
VT-2490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 SC-1320/1324/1330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49
Detector Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 SC-1350/1352/1354/1356/1358 . . . . . . . . 7.50
Vibration Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 SC-1362/1364/1380/1382/1390/1396/1398 7.51
Velocity Pickups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 SC-1300 Ordering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53
SC-1300 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.54
4.Recorders ET-1200/SC-1300 High Density Enclosures 7.57
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
ISM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 8.Transducers
TR-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 CCC-1B/VCC-1B/VCX-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
TR-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17 WV-15/WV-20/WV-25/WV-30 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
DL-8000/DL-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29 PCE/VCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
P&QR128/P&QR256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32 CCC-30B/VCC-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
5.Power Quality WWH/VVH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
RM-10/RM-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
PFA/PFN/PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
PQRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
FCX-1B/FCN-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
PQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
PM-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
PQ Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Uility Power Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
DL-8000/DL-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Calibration Guide & Ordering Guide . . . . . . . 8.36
Power Quality Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Clipping CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37
RiS AiPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
ULtra Transducer Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.39
RiSACE 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
RLP Modular Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46
RisACE 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
DIN Series Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65
RiSACE Quatro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.88
DPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.91
PowerACE Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
DPMS-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.93
6.Distribution Monitoring 9.Calibrators
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
LoadLogger/LL-230A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Load Profiler/LP-260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 CL-4002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
LOADSMART Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 CL-8026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
P&QR128/P&QR256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 DPG-700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
CL-9000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
7. Signal Conditioning AccuPro Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 PMM-9700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
Product Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 PMM-9850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
SC-7400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Total IQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
HHC-4400/7400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
SC-4400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
AMETEK
PRODUCT CATALOG 102

Since 1961, Rochester Instrument Systems, a division of Ametek Power


Instruments, has provided innovative instrumentation from our design and
production facilities in Rochester, New York. Joining with Scientific Columbus in
1996, Rochester has emerged as a leading supplier with its unique one-stop
shopping advantage for customers. Our ISO 9001 certification is proof of our
dedication to high standards of quality in our business and our products. Rochester
has the resources and commitment needed to be a reliable partner for your
worldwide instrumentation requirements.

PUBLICATION 102 COPYRIGHT © 2000


ROCHESTER is ISO-9001 Certified
AMETEK
Services
Ametek Power About Ametek – system is complemented by our
exclusive software that provides reliable
Instruments is a company
dedicated to providing An Introduction communication, on-screen analysis and
automatic printout of data for process
A record of innovation and experience you
the highest quality can depend on. cogeneration applications to utility
products and exceptional generation and transmission networks.
customer service. Our Rochester Instrument Systems, a
division of Ametek, was founded by Power Measurement
ISO-9001 Certification instrumentation professionals in 1961. When you compare specifications and
reflects our commitment For over 30 years we’ve designed and price, it’s clear we’re your choice for
to excellence. manufactured innovative products, power transducers. Whether you’re
provided superior technical training, and measuring inferential power in a process
offered the highest level of services application or telemetering in a substa-
anywhere. We consistently deliver tion we offer the widest range and
• About Ametek – An Introduction
innovative technology to protect your highest operational specification in the
• Worldwide Sales Offices people, your equipment and the industry. We offer % of reading accura-
environment during process plant cies as well as an almost limitless range
operations as well as maximizing utility of application capabilities. Combine this
• Product Information
Customer Service power performance. For the future you with the most competitive pricing
can expect continued support through structure available there is no other
our innovation and experience. choice.
• Training and Field Service
– Ametek Product Training
Workshops Alarm Monitoring Process Monitoring
– Field Service Visual and audible indications of alarms Keep your machinery in peak operating
• Domestic/Canada are the key benefits of our microproces- condition with the best monitoring
• International sor - based annunciator systems. These systems and signal conditioning
• Asia/Pacific Region proven, reliable annunciators give you products in the industry. They not only
maximum flexibility and dependable help protect your expensive equipment
• Repairs, Spare Parts, and operations so you can respond quickly they help reduce overall system cost
Calibration Services and appropriately. Select the model that and calibration efforts. The panel mount
best fits your application: compact models provide the highest density
remote units, compact window based available in smart technology. The
products, or large scale event logging temperature monitoring systems
systems. All of which provide the provide the highest level of operational
highest level of dependability. diagnostics and accuracy.

Our DMS-2000 system provides Test the accuracy of most process


annunciation along with event record- variables safely and easily with our
ing, alarm management, and graphical lightweight, hand-held calibrators.
analysis. This system gives you Representing the best in test and
complete and accurate records of calibration innovation, our calibrators
alarms providing you with confidence in provide benchtop performance in
operation and increased levels of safety. portable units.

For specific event recording needs, our All of these products along with the
Integrated System Monitor provides highest level support, engineering, and
unmatched design specification criteria service mean a winning combination for
with mean time between failure you. We are committed to excellence
measured in years. Modularity and and completely certified to ISO 9001.
speed of response are only a few of the
benefits of these systems. Buying from Ametek Power Instruments
means only one thing – a great value
Power Recording with the highest level of quality. Quality
We pioneered the digital transient not only in the products we ship but
recorder in the mid-1980’s and have also the highest level quality in our
advanced the technology to today’s support, engineering, and service.
level: You get the most sophisticated
fault recording and analysis systems in
the world. Reliable, high speed record-
ing with unsurpassed accuracy is
available from our 8 channel stand alone
unit to our 64 channel system. Each

1.1
AMETEK
Services

Worldwide Sales
Offices
Ametek Power Instruments has two
units, one in Rochester, NY USA, and
one in Crayford, England and Hillend,
Scotland, UK. This catalog applies to
the products sold through our offices in
Rochester, NY. If you are located in the
areas shaded in the figure below, please
contact Ametek UK, or their local
representative, for assistance and
information.

ROCHESTER NY USA BELFAST OFFICE TERRITORY:


TERRITORY: UK, EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST,
WESTERN HEMISPHERE AFRICA

www.rochester.com

Contacting Ametek SINGAPORE OFFICE TERRITORY:


FAR EAST, INDIA, PAKISTAN
Representatives
Ametek Power Instruments has
representatives throughout the USA and
the world. Our representatives are
authorized to provide you literature and
information about Ametek products and
services, and to handle your need for
pricing quotations, delivery times, and
product ordering. If you do not know
your local representative, please contact
the factory in Rochester, NY USA for
assistance.

1.2
Product Information,
Technical Support, and
Customer Service
Your local Ametek sales representative
is your full-service contact for applica-
responsible for making and delivering
our products. Each manufacturing cell
1
tion assistance, pricing, delivery, status, is able to provide application assis-
and customer service. Your local tance, pricing, delivery, status, and
representative knows your needs, and customer service for the particular
can respond directly to you. Your product lines made in the cell.
representative also can provide
demonstrations, evaluation products, Ametek encourages you to contact your
and can arrange for other Ametek authorized representative first. If this is
services. not possible, please use the following
numbers to contact our plant for
To support your local representative, assistance. The 1-800 numbers are
the Ametek plant is organized for direct effective for U.S.A. and Canada only.
contact with the people who are

Requirement Contact Phone Fax

Emergency Ordering Service Hotline 800-881-4156


or Assistance

General Information Switchboard 716-263-7700 716-262-4777


All Ametek Departments

Technical Support or Tech Support Line 800-374-4835 716-238-4985


Field Service/Training

Product Support:

1. Annunciators,
DMS-2000, RiSCue Cell Manager 716-238-4987 716-238-4029

2. Transducers Cell Manager 716-238-4955 716-238-4945

3. Signal Conditioners Cell Manager 716-238-4944 716-238-4097

4. Temp/Vibration
Monitors, Special, and
Out-of-Catalog Products Cell Manager 716-238-4984 716-238-4905

5. Transient Recorders
SERs, ISM-1, Systems Cell Manager 716-238-4987 716-238-4985

6. Calibrator/DPG Cell Manager 716-238-4944 716-238-4097

7. Load/ LineFacts,
LoadLoggers, Trips Cell Manager 716-238-4987 716-238-4985

8. Power Quality Cell Manager 716-238-4700 716-238-4927

Product Literature Only Market Pulse, Inc. 216-460-0809 216-460-0810

Ametek Web Site www.rochester.com Ametek Email info@rochester.com

1.3
AMETEK
Services
Recorder Operation & Maintenance
Training and Field Workshops. Workshops are offered
Service singly or in combinations. Choose one
workshop to fill a specific need, or a
combination workshop to meet several
needs with one session.
RiS Product Training
Workshops Each workshop offers a careful balance
between lecture and hands-on-training.
Learn How To Operate and Maintain Students will gain the practical knowl-
Your Ametek Products edge and experience of dealing with
Ametek Power Instruments is commit- real-world conditions. With the practical
ted to providing cost effective training knowledge gained in a Ametek Work-
for our customers. Ametek offers shop, students can focus on the real
intensive, hands-on workshops where cause of power/process disturbances
you can gain valuable experience and using the “first-out” information provided
training on your Ametek System(s). by a Ametek Sequential Events
Learn how to get the most from your Recorder in optimal working condition.
products with a thorough understanding
of operating characteristics and how to
efficiently correct any misoperation.

Factory Training Workshops Annunciators


Ametek recommends factory training for Ametek offers Annunciator Operation &
individuals or groups of less than five Maintenance Workshops. Choose a
students. Annual Factory Training workshop to fill your specific needs and
Workshops are offered for Transient goals.
Recorder products on an established
schedule. Workshops may also be Each workshop offers a careful balance
arranged at the factory for other Ametek between lecture and hands-on training.
products as needed. Students will gain the practical knowl-
edge and experience of dealing with
On-site Workshops real-world conditions. With the practical
Ametek recommends on-site training for knowledge gained in a Ametek Work-
groups of six to ten students. On-site shop, students can focus on plant
training offers significant savings in operations using the information
student travel and lodging costs. An provided by an Annunciator in optimal
additional benefit is realized as your working condition.
people are trained as a team. Group
dynamics contribute to a thorough Combined Systems
understanding of the subject and • Transient Recorder & Sequence of
overcoming reluctance to ask the Events Recorder systems
instructor questions. • Sequence of Events Recorder &
Annunciator systems
Transient Recorders
Ametek offers Transient Recorder Ametek can provide combinations of
Operation & Maintenance Workshops. workshops for customers with com-
Each workshop offers a careful balance bined systems. Combined systems
between lecture and hands-on training. include multiple equipment types like
Students will gain the practical knowl- the ones listed above. A Total System
edge and experience of dealing with approach to combined systems
real-world conditions. With the practical optimizes student time in class and
knowledge gained in a Ametek Work- reinforces technical skills. Complex
shop, students can focus on the issue system wiring, safety considerations,
of understanding power disturbances, system grounding, input wiring and
line faults, relay response and other other common topics are covered once
critical factors using timely information for both systems to reduce overall
provided by a Ametek Transient class time. Significant additional
Recorder in optimal working condition. savings are realized by making only
one trip to the site.
Sequential Events Recorders
Ametek offers Sequential Events

1.4
Field Service Field Service for the Repair policies
Asia/Pacific Region
Field Service is available for all Ametek 1. Repairs, including products under
Ametek provides Singapore-based field warranty, must have an RMA from
Products and Systems at published services to our customers located in the
rates plus parts and expenses. Field Ametek. An appropriate Purchase Order
Pacific rim countries. Prompt dispatch number for non- warranty repair is
Service may be arranged by contacting of a Field Service engineer can be made
the Cell Manager (see table). Please be needed before work can begin. Items
by contacting the Ametek Cell Manager received without an RMA will be
prepared to explain the nature of the (see table). Full details of the required
service desired, and identify the product returned.
service, including Ametek equipment
by specific model number and serial type and model, should be provided at
number, or system by specific serial 2. Warranty on Repairs Performed by
the time of inquiry. Ametek: Ametek Power Instruments,
number or Ametek Sales Order (S.O.)
number and location. Inc. (Ametek) warrants that repairs on
Repairs, Spare Parts, and Ametek products performed by Ametek
Rates are set at 3 levels: normal hours Calibration Services will be free from defects of workman-
(8 hours/day), overtime hours, and ship or material for 60 days from
holiday hours. Travel time to/from our Ametek provides factory repair for all of delivery of the material to the ordering
Rochester, NY office will also be its products. Rapid turnaround service is customer, or the remainder of the
charged at the normal hourly rate. available. Most repairs are quoted at a original Ametek product warranty,
fixed price, so you know the cost up whichever is longer. Additional terms of
Arrangements for Field Service should front. You or your authorized Ametek the warranty are as stated in the
be made as far in advance as practical. representative can contact Ametek standard Ametek product warranty.
concerning Repair Service (see table).
Parts required for Field Service will be 3. All items repaired by Ametek,
provided at the current list price. If the A Customer Service person is available including warranty repairs, will be
Ametek equipment being serviced is for cost inquiries, quotations, scheduling, returned by the same mode of shipment
under warranty, parts will be repaired by and to provide return material authoriza- as received at Ametek, such as
Ametek at no charge. tion (RMA) during regular business hours overnight, second day, ground express,
(see table). All items returned to Ametek or truck. Ametek will charge when a
Ametek Field Service is warranted must have an RMA number, including more costly shipping mode is requested
against workmanship defects for 60 warranty repairs. for returns.
days from the date of completion of
service, and the work will be docu- Three levels of Repair Service are Calibration Service
mented by a report provided to the available for most products. Complex
customer upon completion. products that require diagnosis and Ametek also provides NIST-Traceable
testing will be repaired at standard rates calibration service for our instruments.
International Field Service and times. Please request the service Calibration service and turnaround is
Arrangements level when contacting Ametek: arranged by contacting the appropriate
Cell (see table). Re-calibration under
Due to the need for work entry permits, 1. Super Service – 48-hour turnaround warranty will be performed at the normal
Visas, and customs clearance for from time of receipt at our Rochester calibration rates.
materials, all Field Service for non-US/ NY facility – guaranteed when you
Canada areas must allow adequate specify Super Service and provide An RMA number must also be obtained
notice of four (4) weeks prior to adequate information to perform the prior to sending in any item for
departure. Emergency arrangements repair. If Ametek does not meet the calibration. A certificate of calibration will
will be made when possible, but promised turnaround, the repair price be provided when the item is returned
Ametek does not have control of the will be reduced by 25%. to you. If calibration cannot be done on
issuing of Government documentation. the item once received by Ametek, you
2. Rush Service – 5 working day will be contacted with further
Nominal preparation time is charged for turnaround from time of receipt at our information.
preparation of travel papers, Visas, Ametek facility is guaranteed, with rates
documents for shipment of material, 10% less than Super Service. If Ametek Spare Parts
etc., when field service is to be per- does not meet the turnaround, repair
formed outside the continental USA or price will be further reduced by 15%. Spare Parts for Ametek equipment can
Canada. International service will be be ordered directly by contacting the
invoiced in US dollars. Currency 3. Standard Service – turnaround for appropriate Cell (see table).
conversion to US dollars will be made at standard service averages two weeks
published rates. after receipt. Standard service is priced
at 25% less than Super Service, and is
available for all Ametek products.

1.5
AMETEK
Services
Payment Out of Catalog Products
as of this catalog:
Ametek provides standard payment
terms of Net 30 days to our domestic SC-7500 Signal Conditioner CL-4006 RTD Calibrator
customers with approved credit. All
sales FOB Factory. SC-4301 Panel Meter CL-4202 Current/Voltage Calibrator
VISA and Mastercard are also CL-2000 Calibrator CL-4205 Temperature Calibrator
accepted.
PM-9900 Pressure Modules MM-9800 Multimeters
s r r TM

VT-1215 Vibration Switch ET-8200 Rack Mounted Trip/Alarms


Consult your Ametek representative for SC-8300 Rack Mounted Transmitters
full details. Previously Obsoleted Products

Warranty TR-1620, TR-1630, TR-1640, TR-1650,


TR-1626, TR-1645 Transient Recorders
Ametek provides a one year warranty
on our products, with factory repair or TR-1625 Master Station
replacement of defective material at our
option. Please consult your Ametek SSM-9400 Smart System Monitor
representative for a complete statement
of warranty terms. CL-4500 SuperCal II

RA-800, RA-1800, RA-2800, RA-3800


Service Contracts
TR-1622, TR-1630P, RCU, TR-1700
Custom System Service
AN-100, AN-1100, AN-2100, AN-4100,
On-site service contracts are available AN-5100, AN-3190
for support of Ametek products. This
offers the advantage of predictable DPG-600, CL-6000
costs for maintenance. An agreement
can be tailored to each customer’s FM-100 Fault Monitor
specific needs. Please contact the Cell
Manager (see table) for more details. TR-1650 Transient Recorder

LP-260 Load Profiler (Replaced by


Out-of-Catalog
Items LF-1 Power Quality Logger)

PR-2050 Tap Position Transmitter


Ametek has discontinued regular
production of several products and
SC-5400 P/I converters
removed them from this catalog. We will
accept new orders for these products
CT-1200 Calibrated Trip Alarms
only upon confirmation from the factory.
Ametek maintains a fully staffed Special
SC-6500 Smart 2-Wire Transmitter
Products Group to handle these out-of-
production products. We will continue
TD-2000 Rack Mounted Transducers
to provide service and support for these
products through spares or replace-
CL-2241 Frequency Calibrator
ment for as long as we can obtain
components.
CL-4001 Current Loop Calibrator

CL-4003 Voltage Calibrator

CL-4004 Loop Powered Indicator

CL-4005 Thermocouple Calibrator

1.6
Agency Approved Products

Ametek offers a variety of products which have agency approvals. Please consult your Ametek representative for availabil-
ity of specific models and features which have received approval, and the class of approval. Ask for drawing #1072-469.

FM FM CSA CSA BASEEFA CENELEC


PRODUCT ORDINARY HAZARDOUS ORDINARY HAZARDOUS HAZARDOUS
LINE LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION

AN-3100C ✓ ✓ ✓
AN-3196B ✓ ✓ ✓
AN-5131 ✓
AN-6150 ✓
TM-2480 ✓
VT-2490 ✓ ✓
VT-3360 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ET-1200 ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-1300 ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-2300 ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-4300 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SC-4400 Pending Pending Pending Pending ✓ ✓
SC-7400 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DPG-700 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

1.7
AMETEK
Services

1.8
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording

The AMETEK series of alarm


annunciators is a family of
products including
microprocessor based
integral annunciators,
annunciator display units and
remote logic annunciators.

The following categories describe our product


offerings:

Integral Annunciators – These annunciators


are self-contained units with front window
display and all alarm electronics included to
support all annunciator functions (alarm
sequences, horn and relay outputs,
pushbuttons). Input and power connections
are made directly at the rear terminals. This is
best suited for applications where the field
contact wiring can be located near the
display.

Display Unit Only – These are lamp boxes


configured in a variety of sizes and shapes.
These are driven from remote annunciator
electronics, PLC, etc.

Remote Annunciators – This annunciator is


provided with all alarm electronics for connec-
tion to remote displays. The alarm inputs
connect directly to this unit and the display is
connected via a cable of pre-determined
length. This is best suited for applications
where ther alarm displays are remote from the
input wiring.

Description Integral Annunciators Display Unit Only Remote Annunciator


Electronics
4 point per cell Back
Lit Window Annunciator AN-3100C AN-5131C AN-6100R
8 point per cell Back
Lit Window Annunciator — AN6150 AN-6100R
12 point LED Annunciator AN-3196 — —

12 point Relay Annunciator SM-100 — —

2.1
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Annunciator Each cell has built in expansion tional sequences and auxiliary relay
• Field Programmable capability with no increase in physical operation.
size or electronics and can have 1, 2,
• Internal Expandability 3, or 4 windows. Multiple window Each Sequence Control Module is
colors are available along with com- internally expandable from 1 to 4
• Modbus Output plete window engraving in various points, depending on the system
sizes. specified.
• Compact Unit This system comes with everything Adjustable Input Response Time
required for complete operation: all The standard response time is 50
• Programmable Common Relay power supplies, control push buttons
Outputs milliseconds. Each module can have
and options. Simply specify a cell optional potentiometers added to
configuration, window colors, power, vary the input response time in a 1 to
• OPC Server
30 second range to eliminate nuisance
alarms (SCI Option).
• Rugged Construction

The AN-3100C annunciator provides Transistor And Logic Level Inputs


a modular design allowing the most From PLCs
flexible physical configuration Transistor and logic level outputs from
available. This window annunciator programmable logic controllers (PLCs),
is cell-based with up to 4 windows, personal computers and other devices
or inputs, per cell. You can put can provide inputs to the AN-3100C.
virtually any number of cells in any (STO Option)
configuration into one system.
Sequence Control Module
High Speed Event Capture
This optional feature captures changes
in normally open or normally closed
field contacts down to 1 millisecond in
duration for transient alarm monitoring.
(SCJ Option)

Optional Auxiliary Relays


You can add repeat relay output
modules to any or all Sequence Control
Modules. The relay output modules
connect to the Sequence Control
Module with a flexible ribbon cable, as
shown in the adjacent photo. The
relays are specified (on a per point
Auxiliary Relay Module — Attached via ribbon basis) as being open or closed, coil
cable to the Sequence Control Module energized or de-energized, and are set
to follow alarm memory, the field
contact, or to mimic the visual display.
sequence and options.
Sequence Control Module Auxiliary Relay Action
The Sequence Control Module detects Follows Field Contact — The auxiliary
changes in field contacts and lights on relay changes state with the field
alarm. Each module contains a contact and is not affected by the
microprocessor that makes it switch sequence or any commands issued.
programmable and internally expand-
able to adapt to changing require- Follows Alarm Memory — The
ments. auxiliary relay changes state on alarm
and stays in alarm until the annunciator
DIP switches allow you to change any visual indication returns to normal.
point from Normally Open to Normally
Closed and select between two Mimics Visual Display — The auxiliary
common relay outputs. On a per relay changes state in relation to the
module basis, you can select opera- visual indication and can drive a lamp

2.2
box. For example, if the annunciator Relay Output Options Other Programmable Options
window is flashing, the auxiliary relay (A, B and C standard) A DIP switch programs flash rates,
will change state at the same rate. A. Critical audible audible pulsing, reset status and
B. Non-critical audible other system options.
Common Service Module C. Ringback audible
The Common Service Module controls D. Power failure LED Displays
E. Common contact follower Optional LED displays can reduce
F. Critical reflash the system power requirements by
G. Non-critical reflash 60 mA per point. LED displays
H. Data bus malfunction require only 10 mA to operate
versus 70 mA for conventional
Power On Indicator bulbs and don’t require replace-
A red colored LED indicates power on ment. The LED displays are
in the integral common service module. normally configured for 4 points
It is located in the center of the push per module. Engraved lamacoid
buttons. tags provide legends.

Fail-Soft Design
If a failure occurs in the Common
Service Module the individual input
Common Service Module — with membrane
switch pad and power on LED
modules still capture alarms and light
the windows.
the annunciator and provides common
relays, power supply and TEST,
ACKNOWLEDGE, SILENCE and
RESET pushbuttons.
The Common Service Module mounts
either integrally to the AN-3100C,
usually occupying the lower right hand
cell, or externally. It is available in
several configurations for remote wall
and panel mounting. The integral Rack Mounted AN-3100C with 4 point LED
version has four push buttons: TEST, display modules
ACKNOWLEDGE, SILENCE, and
RESET; an optional FIRST-OUT RESET
is available. The externally mounted Serial Modbus
CSM provides input for customer The AN-3135 Serial Modbus module
mounted TEST, ACKNOWLEDGE, occupies one cell, and is configured for
SILENCE and RESET pushbuttons. bi-directional communications, as a
master or slave device. It can transmit
Full System Test or receive information using the
The TEST push button initiates a full industry standard Modbus protocol.
system test that simulates inputs and Each serial Modbus module connects
exercises the logic of each cell. Events up to 64 alarm points, and provides
that occur during the test are stored in instant connectivity to PLC, DCS, and
memory and displayed at the end of PL based systems.
the test. The TEST function can also be
switch programmed to actuate auxiliary OPC Server
relays. The AN-3135 Modbus module is
required to activate the OPC (OLE for
Common Service Module process control) server which provides
The Common Service Module normally connectivity to many OPC client
has three common output relays, with up applications.
to five optionally available. The relays can
be selected for up to eight different RiSCue Alarm Management
output options to control audibles, reflash Software
to other annunciators, and detect power The AN-3100C Annunciator can now
or data bus malfunctions. be connected to RiSCue Alarm
Management Software, enhancing your
alarm reporting and notification. See
Section 4 for additional details on
RiSCue.

2.3
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Windows Engraving Guidelines
& Engraving
Maximum Number of Lines Per Window Approximate Total Number
Windows are available in five different
Character Extra Large Large Medium Standard of Characters Available
solid colors to easily differentiate
Size Inches Window Window Window Window on any Line
groups of points by nature of the alarm.
Operators quickly distinguish solid color 02 1/16 33 15 10 5 37
windows.
03 3/32 22 10 7 4 28
04 1/8 16 7 5 3 21
The windows slide onto the front of the
input card and can be quickly removed 05 5/32 13 6 4 3 17
and exchanged when you need to 06 3/16 10 5 3 2 13
internally expand the number of inputs or
change your legend. 07 7/32 9 4 3 2 11
08 1/4 8 4 2 2 10
Each module has up to 8 bulbs to 09 9/36 7 3 2 1 9
provide lighting redundancy in any
configuration or density. Double 10 5/16 6 3 2 1 8
intensity lighting is optional with eight 11 11/32 5 2 1 1 7
bulbs per point on single input and four
bulbs per point on dual input modules. 12 3/8 5 2 1 1 7
13 13/32 5 2 1 1 6
Window Colors Available 14 7/16 4 2 1 1 6
• White
• Red 15 15/32 4 2 1 1 5
• Amber 16 1/2 4 2 1 1 5
• Green
• Blue

Engraving
Fifteen different letter sizes are
available. The chart to the right
describes the maximum number of
lines and maximum number of charac-
ters per line for each letter size. The
standard lettering is in condensed
gothic. Many other types of lettering
and symbols are available.

2.4
1.67"
(42.42mm)

3.34"
(84.48mm)

2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)
Single-point window (extra large) Two-point windows (large)

.83"
1.11" (21.25mm)
(28.3mm)

2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)

Three-point windows (medium) Four-point windows (standard)

2.5
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Dimensions &
Connections
19" Rack Mounting
The standard configuration is 6 cells
wide. It is recommended that systems
less than 6 cells wide be ordered with Typical Rack Mounting Front View
.70
a bezel. (STD/2 Option) (17.8)
E

Mounting Depth: 9" (228.6 mm) D

Mounting Information
A B C D E F
.859 2.609 3.469
1H
(21.8) (66.2) (88.0)
C
1.484 5.434 6.969
2H
Number of Cells High

(37.7) (139.3) (177.0)


1.484 3.734 6.734 8.984 10.469
3H
(37.7) (94.8) (171.0) (228.2) (265.9) F

1.484 5.484 8.484 12.484 13.969


4H
(37.7) (139.3) (215.5) (317.1) (354.8)
1.484 5.484 11.984 15.984 17.469 B
5H
(37.69) (149.3) (304.4) (406.0) (443.7)
1.484 5.484 15.484 19.484 20.969 10.484
6H
(37.69) (139.29) (393.29) (494.9) (532.61) (266.29)
1.484 5.484 18.984 22.984 24.469 12.484
7H
(37.69) (139.29) (482.19) (583.79) (621.51) (317.09)

A
The mounting information shown above provides support
locations depending on the number of cells the system is high. O.O
(distance from 0.0 reference.)

Side View Rear View

WIRING
DUCT

Note: Wiring Duct


supplied on both
← sides for 3 cell high†→
systems and larger.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2.6
Panel Mounting Panel Mounting
All mounting dimensions are based on Depth Behind Panel:
the number of cells, not windows. Each 9.5" (241.3 mm) maximum.
cell can be divided into up to 4 windows.

Dimensions are in inches with millimeters


in parentheses ( ).

NUMBER OF CELLS WIDE

1W 2W 3W 4W 5W 6W 7W 8W 9W 10W 11W 12W 13W 14W 15W

Bezel 5.26 8.17 11.08 13.99 16.90 19.83 22.74 25.65 28.56 31.47 34.38 37.29 40.20 43.11 46.02
Width (133.6) (207.5) (281.6) (355.3) (429.3) (503.7) (577.6) (651.5) (725.4) (799.3) (873.2) (947.1) (1021.1) (1094.9) (1168.9)

Cutout 4.01 6.92 9.83 12.74 15.65 18.56 21.47 24.38 27.29 30.20 33.11 36.02 38.93 41.84 44.75
Width (101.9) (175.8) (249.7) (323.6) (397.5) (471.4) (545.3) (619.3) (693.2) (767.1) (840.9) (914.9) (968.8) (1062.7) (1136.6)

NUMBER OF CELLS HIGH

1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H

Bezel 5.75 9.15 12.56 15.97 19.37 22.77 26.17 29.58 32.99 36.4 39.80 43.20 46.50 50.00 53.40
Height (146.0) (233.0) (319.0) (405.6) (492.0) (578.3) (664.7) (751.3) (837.9) (924.5) (1011.2) (1097.8) (1184.4) (1271.0) (1357.6)

Cutout 4.50 7.90 11.30 14.70 18.10 21.50 24.90 28.30 31.70 35.10 38.50 41.90 45.30 48.70 52.10
Height (114.3) (200.7) (287.0) (373.4) (459.7) (546.1) (632.5) (718.8) (805.2) (891.5) (978.2) (1064.8) (1151.4) (1238.0) (1324.6)

Note: Consult factory for displays beyond 15 high x 15 wide.

BEZEL WIDTH
CUTOUT WIDTH

CUTOUT BEZEL
HEIGHT HEIGHT

2.7
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Dimensions
& Connections

General Outline — Front View

PANEL
MOUNTING
HARDWARE
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
MODULE

TBP, TBB FOR USE WITH


INTEGRAL CSM/POWER SUPPLY

REPEAT
RELAY OPTIONAL INTEGRAL COMMON
MODULE SERVICES MODULE

General Outline — Rear View

BEZEL

PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET


P/N1074-599

TB1 SEQUENCE CONTROL MODULE


MASTER CELLS ONLY

TB2
FOR REPEAT RELAY MODULE

TB3
FOR SYSTEMS WITHOUT
INTEGRAL COMMON SERVICES/
TBF POWER SUPPLY MODULE
FOR INPUT POWER FILTER ASSEMBLY

TBA, TBB
FOR SYSTEMS WITH
INTEGRAL COMMON SERVICES/
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

2.8
Input Field Contact Wiring Typical Field Contact Wiring
(Ametek supplied Field Contact Voltage) 3 Input Modules Shown Wired With
1FCV Connection
TB1 INPUT 1 TB1 INPUT 1
1 1 The field contact can
2 INPUT 2 be either normally open TB1
2 1
3 3 or normally closed by
4 selecting the switch on 2
4 FCV 3
the input module.
5 FCV 5
FCV 4
6 6
Input 2 is wired to 5
the third input 6
INPUT 1
INPUT 1 terminal for this
INPUT 2 configuration.

EXTRA LARGE WINDOW LARGE WINDOW


(FRONT VIEW) (FRONT VIEW)
TB1
1
2
Input 3 is wired to the 4th input 3
terminal in this configuration 4
5
TB1 INPUT 1 TB1 INPUT 1 6
1 INPUT 2 1 INPUT 2
2 2 INPUT 3
3 INPUT 3 3 INPUT 4
4 FCV 4 FCV
5 5 TB1
6 FCV 6 FCV 1
INPUT 1 INPUT 1 2
INPUT 2 3
INPUT 2 4
INPUT 3
INPUT 3 INPUT 4 5
MEDIUM WINDOW 6
STANDARD WINDOW
(FRONT VIEW) (FRONT VIEW) TO OTHER
FIELD CONTACTS
Note: Terminals 5 and 6 are connected internally. FCV is replaced where
utilizing logic inputs in lieu of contact closures.

Isolated Field Contact Wiring


(Customer Supplied Field Contact Voltage) Repeat Relay Wiring
(AN-3143-9 isolated input module)
Maximum 3 pts. per cell.
TB2 TB2

TB1 1
1 120 VAC, 24VDC POINT ONE 1
RELAY OUTPUT POINT ONE
2 or 125 VDC 2 RELAY OUTPUT
2
3
4 3
3
5
6 INPUT 1 4
4
5
5
EXTRA LARGE WINDOW POINT TWO
(FRONT VIEW) 6 RELAY OUTPUT
6
7
7
TB1
1 120 VAC, 24VDC 8
or 125 VDC 8
2
3 SINGLE POINT
TWO POINT
4
5 120 VAC, 24VDC
6 or 125 VDC

TB2 TB2
INPUT 1
1 1
INPUT 2 POINT ONE POINT ONE
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
LARGE WINDOW 2 2
(FRONT VIEW)
3 POINT TWO 3
POINT TWO
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
TB1 4 4
1
2 5 5
3 120 VAC, 24VDC POINT THREE
or 125 VDC 6
RELAY OUTPUT
4 6
5
6 7 7
Customer Supplied POINT THREE POINT FOUR
Field Contact Voltage Options RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
INPUT 1 8 8
INPUT 2 D/ISO = 125 VDC FCV THREE POINT FOUR POINT
INPUT 3 X/ISO = 24 VDC FCV
MEDIUM WINDOW Y/ISO = 120 VAC FCV
(FRONT VIEW)
T/ISO = 48 VDC FCV

2.9
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C NEMA
Panel Covers
For applications where panel NEMA Front Cover (NFC) Options
mounted annunciation in hostile Approximate Dimensions
environments is required, NEMA 4/
12 panel covers are recommended.
Cell Format H L
Many standard sizes are available.
To help choose the panel cover that
1 high x 3 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
best meets your needs, please
x 4 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
consult the adjacent chart.
x 5 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
2 high x 2 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
3 high x 3 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 12 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
4 high x 2 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 6 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 8 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
x 12 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
5 high x 3 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)

Standard width is 1.60" (40.6 mm)

NOTE: Please consult factory for certified drawings and for other available sizes.

1.60"
(40.6mm)

Hinged NEMA 4/12 H


Panel Mount Covers
The panel cover is constructed of 16
gauge, cold-rolled steel with a textured
black finish. The corners are sealed by a
neoprene sponge gasket and the
window is 1/8" thick plexiglass. Adjust- L
able grip latches secure the hinged cover
to the mounting plate.

2.10
AN-3100C For Hazardous
Locations 11.75"
NEMA Enclosures (298.4mm)
Three standard NEMA 4/12 type
surface mount enclosures are available:
a 12 cell model (3H x 4W), an 8 cell
model (4H x 2W), and a 4 cell model
(4H x 1W). All housings are oil-tight,
water-tight, weather resistant and can
be equipped for purge applications.
Standard features include door-
mounted pushbuttons. Available 20.00"
options include repeat relays, external (508.0mm)
audibles and pushbuttons, and a
common-alarm rotating dome light.
The rotating dome light is designed to
alert operators of alarms in conditions
where noise may drown out audibles. It
can be specified in red, blue, amber, or
green for either integral or remote
mounting.
16.00"
Approvals (406.4mm)
FM and CSA approved for ordinary
locations. Some models approved by
FM for hazardous locations (DIV 2). Surface Mount NEMA 4/12
Consult factory for details. Enclosure - 4H x 1W and 4H x 2W

12.68"
(322.1mm)

24.00"
(609.6mm)

20.00"
(508.0mm)

Surface Mount NEMA 4/12


Enclosure - 3H x 4W

2.11
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Specifications AN-3100C Peripherals
Input Signals (Alarm Signals): Horn
A. Relay contacts, normally closed or standby. 24 VDC P/N 1011 – 349
normally open. Isolated 24, 48 or 120 VAC P/N 4200 – 004
125 VDC normally supplied for Retransmitting Relay Ratings: 125 VDC P/N 1049 – 145
use on field contacts; 12, 24, 48, Contacts rated at 5 amperes at 24 VDC
125, or 250 VDC may also be or 120 VAC and 0.1 ampere at 125
4"
(101.6mm)
2.75"
(69.9mm)
supplied by customer. VDC resistive.
B. Optically isolated inputs
1. AC wetted contact (8 VAC through Audible Relay Ratings:
128.7 VAC customer supplied) 2 amperes at 24VDC 4"
(101.6mm)
can be used. Maximum number 0.6 amperes at 120VAC
of points per cell is three. AC 0.1 amperes at 125 VDC resistive
wetted contacts up to 12 in series
may also be monitored at 120 Controls (Integral or Remote):
VAC ±20%. (SCM Option) A. Acknowledge pushbutton. KNOCKOUT FOR
.75" (19.08mm) DIA.
2. DC series contact (10 VDC through B. Silence pushbutton. CONDUIT-2 SIDES

140 VDC customer supplied) can C. Test pushbutton.


be used. Maximum number of D. Reset pushbutton.
points per cell is three. DC wetted KNOCKOUT FOR
.5" (12.7mm) DIA.
contacts (up to nine ) may also be Circuit Design: CONDUIT TOP & BOTTOM
monitored at 125 VDC ±15%. Microprocessor per module. 2"
(SCM Option) (50.8mm)

C. Computer or other instrument-type Packaging:


logic solid-state input voltages. Extruded aluminum cell with inter- 2"
(50.8mm)
changeable plug-in modules. 1.5"
Output Signals: (38.1mm)

A. Lights (steady, fast flash, slow Ambient Temperature Range: 1.25"


flash, or intermittent fast flash). 32°F to 140°F, 0°C to 60°C. (31.8mm)
B. Auxiliary relays (retransmitting). .25" (6.4mm)
C. Alarm, critical alarm, and ringback Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing. .71875" 2.5625" DIA. (4 HOLES)
(18.3mm) (65.1mm)
audible relays.
D. Reflash and critical reflash Window Sizes:
retransmit output relays. A. 0.83" x 2.85" (21.25 x 72.39mm),
E. Power Monitor output relay. standard.
F. Common Contact Follower relay. B. 1.11" x 2.85" (28.3 x 72.39mm), Sound level: 97 dB at 10'.
G. Data Bus Malfunction relay. medium. Weight: 2 lbs. 4 oz (1.0 kg)
C. 1.67" x 2.85" (42.42 x 72.39mm),
Response Time: 50 milliseconds large. Bell — Vibrating Edwards
standard; 1 millisecond to 30 seconds D. 3.34" x 2.85" (84.84 x 72.39mm), No. 435-6" 24 VDC
available optionally. extra large. P/N 1023-298
Surge Withstand Capability (SWC): Weight: 1.68 lbs (0.76 kg) per cell.
6" MAX.
(152.4mm)
2.90625"
(73.8mm)
Test conforms to ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-
1989 (oscillatory) and IEC 801-4 Level Approvals:
2. FM and CSA approved for ordinary
locations. Some models FM approved
Power Requirements: for hazardous locations (DIV 2). Consult
A. 120 VAC, +16%, -25% (50 or 60 factory for details.
Hz).
B. 240 VAC, +16%, -25% (50 or 60 Hz)
C. 24VDC, +25%, -16%
D. 125 or 250 VDC, +25%, -20%
E. 48VDC, +25%, -10%
F. 4.5 watts per point on alarm;
approximately 1 watt per point on

Universal adaptaplate mounts directly on


surface of any single gang opening: 3 1/4,"
3 1/2", 4" octagon; 4" SQ. box or equivalent
surface fitting. Sound level: 92 dB at 10'.
Weight: 2 lbs. 11 oz. (1.2 kg)

2.12
Buzzer — Vibrating Edwards No. 343-A 24 VDC Remote Mounted Sonalert
P/N 1005-563 Steady P/N 1011-350
Pulsing P/N 1021-949
NOSE RING
5.25" MAX. 2.375" 1.125-24 THD.
(133.4mm) (60.3mm)
6-32

1.3125"
(33.3mm)

.25"
(6.35mm)

1.6875" .375" 1.42" .4375"


(42.9mm) (9.5mm) (36mm) (11.1mm)

Universal adaptaplate mounts directly on surface of any single gang


opening: 3 1/4", 3 1/2", 4" octagon; 4" SQ. box or equivalent surface 1.25"
fitting. Sound level: 70 dB at 10'. Weight: 2 lbs. 5 oz. (1.1 kg) (31.75mm)

Beacon — Federal Model 121A Vitalite + –


P/N 1055-365
1.15625"
(29.4mm)
REVOLVING MOUNTING TEMPLATE
PARABOLIC Mtg. Hole
REFLECTOR

PLASTIC LAMP
HOUSING 2" Sound level: 60-80 dB. Weight: 3 oz. (.1 kg)
(50.83215mm) R.

6.5" 125°
(165.1mm)
100°
Remote Mounted Pushbuttons
.140625"
(3.57188mm) 125°
3 HOLES
RUBBER
SPACER
.40625" 2 PANEL (.0625" to .25" thk)
(10.31875mm) DIA.
ROOF HOLE FOR GROMMET
SHEET 3
METAL GROMMET
SCREW .134 Drill
5.125"
1 .140
(130.2mm)
1.203125"
(30.5mm)
Voltages: 12, 24 or 32/36 VDC
.600"
Weight: 1 lb. 3 oz. (.5 kg) 1.78125" 1.375"
(15.2mm)
(45.2mm) (34.9mm)

Electronic Horn
Model AN-1150A Mtg. Hole

12.00" 1.09375" 1.4375"


(304.8mm)
6.50" 2.68" (27.8mm) (36.5mm)
(165.1mm) (68.1mm)

1.68"
(42.7mm)

.343"
(8.71mm)

SEE DETAIL
NOTE: Contact Rating: Continuous, 10 A Normal Load
12.00"
‘A’
12.00"
Break: 120 VAC, 6 A or 125 VDC 2.2 A.
(304.8mm)
(304.8mm) 11.86"
(301.2mm)
Weight: 6 oz. (.2 kg)

Chime — Edwards 339-G1 24 VDC


P/N 1070-078

5.25"
3.15625"
(133.4mm) (80.2mm)

DETAIL ‘A’
.125" R
5.25"
(133.4mm)
.343" 6.5"
(8.71mm) (165.1mm)

11.86"
(301.2mm) .437 DIA.

24 VDC, 48 VDC, 125 VDC, 120 VAC, 240 VAC


Sound level: 96 dB at 10'. Weight: 11 lbs. 14 oz. (5.4 kg) Sound level: 81 dB at 10'. Weight: 2 lbs. 7 oz. (1.2 kg)
Two adjustable tones, adjustable volume
2.13
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Power Table 1 — Integral Power Supply — Power Monitor AN-039
Maximum Number of Display Cells*
Supplies & Accessories
Ametek offers two configurations of Cell Configuration
power supplies: integral or remote wall 4 pts 3 pts/ 2 pts/ 1 pt/
mounted. Input voltages are 120 VAC, cell cell cell cell
240 VAC, 250 VDC, 125 VDC or 48
VDC. (24 VDC requires no power supply.) No relay 10 14 21 21
no audible
Integral Power Supply With relay 8 11 17 19
The integral power supply takes up one no audible
cell and is contained within the same
cell as the Common Service Module for With relay 8 11 17 18
maximum space savings. The integral and Sonalert For monitoring prime or backup power.
supply is provided any time that the With relay 8 10 15 17
integral Common Service Module is Output Signal: Form C relay output
and horn contacts rated at 10 amps, 24 VDC or
specified, providing that the supply has
the drive capacity to power the number 120 VAC resistive.
of windows. See Table 1. Table 2 —External Power Supply —
Maximum Number of Display Cells Dimension:
(Ratings per single power supply)* 8.5" (216.0mm) h
Remote Mounted Power Supply
The remote mounted power supply is Cell Configuration 2.75" (70mm) w
only provided when a remote mounted 5.2" (132.1mm) d
4 pts/ 3 pts/ 2 pts/ 1 pt/
Common Service Module is specified cell cell cell cell
or when the integral supply cannot be Weight: 2 lbs. 8 oz. (1.1 kg)
used. Also, the remote supply contains No relay 24 32 47 48
the common module. The remote no audible
supply is extremely compact and Ground Detector PR-2000
With relay 19 25 38 42
provides a higher drive capability than no audible
the integral supply. Multiple remote
supplies are provided when the With relay 19 25 38 42
window capacity becomes too large for and Sonalert
a single remote supply. See Table 2. With relay 19 25 37 41
and horn
Tables 1 and 2 are for quick reference.
Both tables present the maximum *Nominal 100% lamp duty cycle @ 30ºC,
number of cells a single power supply derate to 50% lamp duty cycle @ 60ºC.
can drive.

AN-3100C Remote Power Supply Dimensions


For detecting grounds in field wiring.
TYPICAL CONDUIT
MOUNTING HARDWARE
Output Signal: SPDT contacts rated 10
amps, 28 VDC or 120 VAC resistive.

OPTIONAL
Trip Adjustment: 1K-150 Kohm,
TERMINAL
BLOCK
COVER
WEIGHT:
1. HIGH POWER VERSION: 5 LB, 7 OZ.
continuously adjustable
2. LOW POWER VERSION: 4 LB, 14 OZ.
3. COMMON SERVICES ONLY:4 LB, 5 OZ

TB1 TB1
Consult factory for details on this
1 1
product.

10.25 [ 260.35 ]

10.75 [ 273.05 ]

12 12
OPTIONAL
INTEGRAL PUSHBUTTONS
FOR COMMON SERVICES

SILENCE ACKNOWLEDGE
LARGE HEATSINK PROFILE POWER
FOR HIGH POWER VERSION
TEST RESET

NO HEATSINK FOR COMMON 0.25 [ 6.4 ]


SERVICES ONLY
1.33 [ 33.8 ] 2 PLACES
2.75 [ 69.9 ]
0.25 [ 6.4 ] MTG. HOLE
2 PLACES 3.80 [ 96.5 ]
7.69 [ 195.3 ] 4.00 [ 101.6 ]

2.14
AN-3100C Programmable Option Function Description
Sequences
Fourteen sequences are switch 1 Silence Pushbutton A separate pushbutton to allow silencing the
selectable on an individual input audible device without affecting visual displays.
module basis. A brief description of
each of the nine basic sequences and 2 Interlock Pushbutton An interlock requiring operation of the
a list of available options is given pushbuttons in sequence of SILENCE,
below. ACKNOWLEDGE, RESET.

A — Automatic Reset. Acknowledged 4 No Lock-In The lock-in feature is deleted.


alarm indications are automatically Momentary alarms return to the normal
reset when process conditions return sequence state without operation of the
to normal. ACKNOWLEDGE pushbutton.

M — Manual Reset. Acknowledged 6 No Audible The audible device is deleted.


alarm indications must be manually
reset when process conditions return 7 Automatic Silence A time delay device to silence the alarm
to normal. audible device after a set time of 30
seconds, without affecting the visual displays.
R — Ringback. Provides visual and
audible indications to alert operators 8 Common Ringback A common audible device to call attention to
both under alarm conditions and when both the alarm and ringback sequence states.
alarms return to normal.
10 No Ringback Audible The ringback audible device is deleted.
F1A — First-Out. Initial alarm is
highlighted by flashing and audible 11 Common Ringback The same type flashing indication is
indications. Subsequent alarms go into Visual used to indicate both the alarm and ringback
the acknowledged state and are not sequence states.
locked in if momentary.
12 Automatic Momentary Ringback sequence momentary alarms
F2M-1 — First-Out. Similar to F1A Ringback go to the ringback state without
except that the Silence pushbutton operation of the ACKNOWLEDGE
can silence the audible and retain the pushbutton.
First-Out flashing. Momentary alarms
are locked in and manual reset is
required. Basic
Sequence R—12
Letter Key Words Basic
FFAM2 — First-Out. Similar to F2M-1 Sequence Option
except that the First-Out alarm can A Automatic Reset Number
M Manual Reset Letter
only be reset after the process
condition has returned to normal. R Ringback
F2M — 1
F3A — First-Out. Similar to F1A First Out First Out
except that two visual flash rates are Designation Key Words Designation
provided, one for First-Out and one for F1 No Subsequent Alarm
State Option
subsequent alarms. A First-Out Reset Basic Number
pushbutton is required. F2 No Subsequent Alarm Sequence
Flashing Letter
F3C — First-Out. Dual color red/white F3 First Out Flashing and
sequence, red on first-out, white on Reset Pushbutton
subsequent.

R-12C — Ringback. Dual color


sequence, white on alarm, green on
visual ringback.
LEGEND
P Process
Multiple First-Out Groups. Optional S Sequence
up to four separate first-out groups per V Visual
annunciator. A Audible LAMP OFF LAMP LAMP ON HORN OFF HORN ON
FLASHING

2.15
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Operational
Sequences
Sequence “A” Features: Standard Sequence “A”
• Acknowledge and Test
push buttons NORMAL P
• Alarm audible device NORMAL S
• Lock-in of momentary alarms OFF V
until acknowledged
SILENT A
• The audible device is silenced and
Return to To Abnormal
flashing stops when acknowledged Normal
• Automatic reset of acknowledged
alarm indications when process ABNORMAL OR
ABNORMAL P NORMAL P
conditions return to normal Acknowledged
While Abnormal
• Operations test ACKNOWLEDGED S ALARM S
ON V FLASHING V
SILENT A AUDIBLE A

ISA RETURN TO RETURN TO


ALARM NORMAL NORMAL
REFERENCE DEVICE ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.

VISUAL
ISA-A
AUDIBLE

Sequence “M” Features:


• Acknowledge and Test
push buttons
Standard Sequence “M”
• Alarm audible device
• Lock-in momentary alarms NORMAL P
until acknowledged NORMAL S
• The audible device is silenced and OFF V
flashing stops when acknowledged
• Manual reset of acknowledged SILENT A
Reset
While Normal
alarm indications when process To Abnormal

conditions return to normal


• Operational test ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P NORMAL P
ACKNOWLEDGED S ALARM S
ON V Acknowledge FLASHING V
SILENT A AUDIBLE A

ISA ALARM RETURN TO


RETURN TO NORMAL
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.

VISUAL
ISA-M
AUDIBLE

2.16
Sequence “R-12” Features: Standard Sequence “R-12”
• Acknowledge, Reset and Test NORMAL P
push buttons NORMAL S
• Alarm and ringback audible devices
• The audible device is silenced and OFF V
fast flashing stops when SILENT AA
acknowledged SILENT RA
• Ringback visual and audible Reset To Abnormal
indications when process conditions
Acknowledge
return to normal While
NORMAL P ABNORMAL OR P
• Manual reset of ringback indications Normal NORMAL
• Operational test RINGBACK S ALARM S
SLOW FLASHING V FAST FLASHING V
SILENT AA Return to Abnormal AUDIBLE AA
AUDIBLE RA SILENT RA

Return Acknowledge
ABNORMAL P While Abnormal
to Normal
ACKNOWLEDGED S
ON V
P Process A Audible SILENT AA
S Sequence AA Alarm Audible
V Visual RA Ringback Audible SILENT RA

ISA RETURN TO
ALARM NORMAL RETURN TO
REFERENCE DEVICE ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.

VISUAL
FAST SLOW SLOW SLOW
R-12
AUDIBLE

*A distinctly different ringback audible can be provided in most cases


* * *

Sequence “F2M-1” Features: First-Out Sequence “F2M-1”


• Silence, Acknowledge, Reset and NORMAL P
Test push buttons
NORMAL S
• Alarm audible device
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until OFF V
acknowledged SILENT A
Reset
• Option 1: Silence push button to While Normal Subsequent
First to Abnormal
silence the audible device to
Abnormal
while retaining First-Out
ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR
flashing indication NORMAL P Silence NORMAL P NORMAL P
• Flashing indication for first alarm ACKNOWLEDGED S SUBSEQUENT
ALARM S FIRST ALARM S
only. New subsequent alarms have ON V Acknowledge ON V FLASHING V
the same visual indication as
acknowledged alarms SILENT A AUDIBLE A AUDIBLE A
• First-Out indication is reset when
acknowledged Acknowledge (First-Out Reset)
• Manual reset of acknowledged
alarm indications after process ABNORMAL P

conditions return to normal Acknowledge FIRST SILENCED S Silence


• Operation test (First-Out Reset) FLASHING V
SILENT A

ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE


ISA ALARM BEFORE ACK. FIRST-OUT
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL RESET
INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT

VISUAL
F2M-1
† AUDIBLE

† Silence function not shown. See line diagram above.


2.17
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C Operational
Sequences First-Out Sequence “FFAM2”
Sequence “FFAM2” Features:
• Silence, Acknowledge Reset and NORMAL P
Test push buttons NORMAL S
• Alarm audible device OFF V
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until SILENT A
acknowledged Reset
While Normal First to Abnormal
• Option 1: Silence push button to Subsequent
to
silence the audible device while Abnormal
retaining First-Out flashing indication ABNORMAL OR
P Silence
ABNORMAL OR
P ABNORMAL OR
P
NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL
• Flashing indication for first alarm SUBSEQUENT
ACKNOWLEDGED S S FIRST ALARM S
only. New subsequent alarms have ALARM

the same visual indication as ON V Acknowledge ON V Reset


While
FLASHING V
acknowledged alarms SILENT A AUDIBLE A Normal AUDIBLE A
• First-Out point can only be reset
after it has returned to normal
ABNORMAL OR
• Manual reset of acknowledged NORMAL P
alarm indications after process FIRST SILENCED S
conditions return to normal FLASHING V Acknowledge or
• Operational test Silence
Reset While Normal SILENT A

ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE


SEQUENCE ALARM BEFORE ACK. FIRST-OUT
CODE DEVICE NORMAL RESET
INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT

VISUAL
FFAM2
AUDIBLE

Note: Silence function not shown. See line diagram above. Depressing Reset button will cause light to go Steady On.

Sequence “F3A”
Sequence “F3A” Features:
NORMAL P
• Acknowledge, First-Out Reset and
Test push buttons NORMAL S
• Alarm audible device OFF V
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until SILENT A
acknowledged Return
First to Abnormal
to Normal Acknowledge Subsequent
• First-Out flashing is different from While to
subsequent flashing Normal Abnormal

• First-Out reset push button to ABNORMAL P ABNORMAL OR


NORMAL P ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P
change the First-Out visual SUBSEQUENT SUBSEQUENT FIRST ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGED S Acknowledge ALARM S First-Out S
indication to be the same as
ON V While SLOW FLASHING* V Reset INTERMITTENT V
subsequent visual indications Normal FAST FLASHING
• Automatic reset of acknowledged SILENT A AUDIBLE A AUDIBLE A
alarm indications after process First-Out Reset
conditions return to normal While Normal
First-Out Reset
• Operational test While Abnormal
Acknowledge
ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P
FIRST
ACKNOWLEDGED S
FAST FLASHING* V * Slow and fast flashing can be
interchanged and customer selected by
jumper changes on the common module
SILENT A

ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE


ISA ALARM BEFORE ACK. FIRST-OUT
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL RESET
INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT

VISUAL
INT. FAST SLOW FAST FAST INT. FAST SLOW FAST
F3A
AUDIBLE

2.18
Sequence “F1A” Features:
• Acknowledge and Test push
buttons
• Alarm audible device
• Lock-in of momentary first alarm Sequence “F1A”
until acknowledged. No lock-in of
NORMAL P
momentary alarms
• Flashing and audible indications for NORMAL S
first alarm only. New subsequent OFF V
alarms go to the acknowledged SILENT A
state Return First to
to Normal Abnormal
• First-Out indication is reset and the
audible is silenced when Subsequent Acknowledge
to Abnormal While Normal
acknowledged ABNORMAL P (First-Out Reset) ABNORMAL OR
P
NORMAL
• Automatic reset of acknowledged
ACKNOWLEDGED S FIRST ALARM S
alarm indications after process
conditions return to normal ON V FLASHING V
• Operational test SILENT A Acknowledge AUDIBLE A
While Normal
(First-Out Reset)

ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE


ISA ALARM BEFORE ACK.
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL
INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT

VISUAL
F1A
AUDIBLE

Sequence “F3C” Features:


• Acknowledge, First-Out Reset and Sequence “F3C”
Test Pushbuttons
• Alarm audible device NORMAL P
• Lock-in of momentary alarms until NORMAL S
acknowledge OFF V
• First-Out color is different from
SILENT A
subsequent color Return
First to Abnormal
• First-Out Reset pushbutton to change to Normal Acknowledge Subsequent
While to
the First-Out visual indication to be Normal Abnormal
the same as subsequent visual ABNORMAL OR ABNORMAL OR
ABNORMAL P NORMAL P NORMAL P
indications
SUBSEQUENT SUBSEQUENT FIRST ALARM
• Automatic reset of acknowledged ACKNOWLEDGED S Acknowledge ALARM S First-Out S
alarm indications when process WHITE ON V While WHITE FLASHING V Reset RED FLASHING V
Normal
conditions return to normal SILENT A AUDIBLE A AUDIBLE A
• Operational test using sequence:
First-Out Reset
Test; First-Out Reset; Acknowledge While Normal
First-Out Reset Acknowledge
While Abnormal
ABNORMAL P
P Process
FIRST
S Sequence ACKNOWLEDGED S
V Visual RED ON V
A Audible
SILENT A

ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE


ISA ALARM BEFORE ACK. FIRST-OUT
REFERENCE DEVICE NORMAL RESET
INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT INITIAL NEXT

VISUAL
RED WHITE RED WHITE RED RED WHITE RED
F3A
AUDIBLE

2.19
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
Standard Sequence “R-12C”
AN-3100C Operational NORMAL P
Sequences NORMAL S
Sequence “R-12C” Features
OFF V
• Acknowledge, Reset and Test
Pushbuttons SILENT AA
• Alarm and ringback audible devices SILENT RA
• The audible device is silenced and Reset To Abnormal
flashing stops when acknowledged
Acknowledge
• Ringback visual and audible While ABNORMAL OR
NORMAL P Normal P
indications when process conditions NORMAL

return to normal RINGBACK S ALARM S


• Manual reset of ringback indications COLOR #2
FLASHING V COLOR #1
FLASHING V
• Operational test SILENT AA Return to Abnormal AUDIBLE AA
AUDIBLE RA SILENT RA
Annunciator sequences are from
ISA Standard S18.1.© Return ABNORMAL P Acknowledge
Instrument Society of America. to Normal While Abnormal
1979, reprinted with permission. ACKNOWLEDGED S
COLOR #1 ON V
P Process A Audible SILENT AA
S Sequence AA Alarm Audible
V Visual RA Ringback Audible SILENT RA

ISA RETURN TO
ALARM NORMAL RETURN TO
REFERENCE DEVICE ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE NORMAL NORMAL ACKNOWLEDGE RESET
BEFORE ACK.

VISUAL
COLOR #1 FLASH COLOR #1 ON COLOR #2 FLASH COLOR #2 FLASH COLOR #2 FLASH
R-12
AUDIBLE

*A distinctly different ringback audible can be provided in most cases


* * *

AN-3100C Ordering
The model number of the AN-3100C consists of twelve (12) items derived from the order codes listed below. When ordering a
system that includes any “intermix” options (e.g. more than one window color), an intermix order form should be completed to
fully define the annunciator. If you have any questions, contact your nearest Ametek representative for assistance.

AN-3100C - 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 10 – 11 – 12
_________ _________ _______ _____ _____ _______ _________ ___________ ____ _________ _______ ______
Number of Number of Common Window Active Window Operational Field Contact Prime Relay Per Standard Engraving
Cells High Cells Wide Module Size Points Color Sequence Voltage Power Point Options

ORDER CODE FOR EACH ENTRY


ITEM Item 3 Item 4
Each item has a unique order code Order Order
which must be entered in its specific Code Common Module Code Window Size
location in the model number sequence. INTB Integral with pushbuttons 4 Standard, 4 per cell
The following is a tabulation of the order (mounted in lower right cell) 3E Medium, 3 per cell, field
codes that must be used for each and INTO Integral without pushbuttons expandable
every item of the standard model (mounted in lower right cell — 2E Large, 2 per cell, field expandable
number. requires external pushbuttons) 1E Extra large, 1 per cell, field
RPB Remote, panel mount with expandable
Item 1 pushbuttons LED LED display, 4 per cell
The order code defines the number of RWO Remote, wall mount without FC Future cell, provided with an
cells high, not to exceed 12. pushbuttons (requires external extra large size, matching
pushbuttons) window (logic module and lamps
Item 2 not included)
The order code defines the number of IMW Intermix window size
cells wide, not to exceed 12. 1N Extra large, 1 per cell,
non-expandable
2N Large, 2 per cell
non-expandable

2.20
Item 5 Item 10 SCO/3 Three first-out groups
Active Point — define total number of Relay State SCO/4 Four first-out groups
equipped or active points. When Field STA Pulsing the alarm audible at the
Input Is In Its slow flash rate, not available
Item 6 Order Normal with first out sequences.
Order Code Relay Action Condition STB Pulsing the ringback audible at
Code Window Color NR No relays required the slow flash rate.
W White FOE Follows field contact Contacts open/ STC/1 Automatic alarm and ringback
R Red coil energized silence after 30 seconds
A Amber FOD Follows field contact Contacts open/ STC/2 Audible delay of automatic
G Green coil de-energized alarm and ringback silence
B Blue FCE Follows field contact Contacts closed/ adjustable up to 10 hours
LED LED coil energized (remote time delay relay)
IMC Intermix window color FCD Follows field contact Contacts closed/ STD/1 19 inch rack mounting
Refer to Intermix Matrix Order Form on coil de-energized STD/2 19 inch bezel rack mounting
page 2.23 for location. MOE Follows alarm memory Contacts open/ STE Rear terminal cover
coil energized STG/1** Steady Sonalert mounted in
Item 7 MOD Follows alarm memory Contacts open/ a cell (requires one extra cell)
A. Define the operational sequence coil de-energized STG/2** Pulsing Sonalert mounted in
by letter designation from the MCE Follows alarm memory Contacts closed/ a cell (requires one extra cell)
sequences shown on page 2.15 coil energized STI Critical/non-critical relays
and enter that designation in the MCD Follows alarm memory Contacts closed/ activated at the same time
model number format. coil de-energized STL Double intensity, available
IMR Intermix relays only with extra large (one per
B. For an intermix sequence, Refer to Intermix Matrix Order Form cell) and large (two per cell)
enter order code IMO in the model on page 2.23 for location. windows. Doubles power
number format. Note that all STK Additional Relay Per Point supply requirements.
points STM Moisture/fungus proof coating
in the same cell must have the Item 11 STN Status point indication in
same sequence. Order place of alarm point indication
Code Description STO Transistor and logic level
Item 8 SCA Auxiliary relay test inputs, specify exact type
Order RMD Auxiliary relays mimic visual STZ Increased input response in
Code Field Contact Voltage display place of (Fixed) standard 50 ms.
D 125 VDC SCC Common contact follower Specify one of the following with
X 24 VDC relay output (takes the place order: 70 ms, 120 ms, 200 ms,
T 48 VDC of the ringback audible relay) 500 ms, 700 ms, 1 sec, 2 sec
D/ISO 125 VDC, isolated, three SCD Power failure relay output (See SCI)
points per cell maximum SCE Loss of data buss relay output PORT/1 AN-3135 1-24 Inputs
Y/ISO 120 VAC, isolated, three SCF Common non-critical reflash Serial Modbus
points per cell relay output PORT/2 AN-3135 25-48 Inputs
maximum SCG Common critical reflash relay Serial Modbus
X/ISO 24VDC, isolated, three output PORT/3 AN-3135 49-64 nputs
points per cell maximum SCH No audible on test Serial Modbus
T/ISO 48 VDC, isolated, three SCI Adjustable time delay, in
points per cell, maximum specific ranges: **Location must be defined by com-
SCI/1 2 to 30 seconds pleting the intermix matrix form.
Item 9 SCI/2 1 to 14 seconds
SCI/3 0.4 to 6 seconds NOTE: Any model number containing
Order Prime Power/Power
SCI/4 .07 to 1 second IMW, IMC, IMO, or IMR designations
Code Supplies
SCJ Decreased response time. requires an intermix matrix order form.
F 24 VDC, non-isolated
With normally open field
supply
contacts. Captures alarms Item 12
E 48 VDC, isolated supply
down to 1 millisecond in
C 125 VDC, isolated supply Order
duration.
H 250 VDC, isolated supply Code Engraving
SCM Series contacts inputs
B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Y Engraving provided by
SCN Blocking diodes. Allows
isolated supply Ametek
sharing of field contacts with
A 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NR Engraving not required
other devices for DC FCV only.
isolated supply
SCO/2 Two first-out groups

2.21
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3100C
Intermix Matrix
The basic model number does not
provide the necessary information to
configure special intermix options WINDOW
(window size/color, sequence, relays). COLOR CODE
When intermixed codes are used, this WINDOW
form must accompany the order to SIZE CODE
allow us to properly configure the
system to the customer's require-
ments.
RELAY CODE
Step 1: If utilizing internal CSM, allow
one cell position. SEQUENCE FOR FIRST-OUT
SEQUENCE GROUP
Step 2: Define each cell’s require-
ments as shown: SEQUENCE CODE
(MARK FUTURE CELLS –“FC”).

Step 3: Make any appropriate notes


at the bottom of the form. (See next
page for reproducible form).
Example 1
WINDOW
COLOR CODE
WINDOW
SIZE CODE

4 W
4 R
N/A RELAY CODE
4 A
4 G
R-12 SEQUENCE FOR FIRST-OUT
SEQUENCE GROUP
SEQUENCE CODE

Example 2

WINDOW
COLOR CODE
WINDOW
SIZE CODE

2E R
FOD RELAY CODE
4 A
4 G
F3A 2 SEQUENCE FOR FIRST-OUT
SEQUENCE GROUP
SEQUENCE CODE

2.22
Intermix Matrix Order Form
(Reproduce as necessary)
COLUMNS
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F
ROWS

A
COMMON
MODULE

Additional Information ____________________________________________________________________________


______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.23
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording

AN-5131 Annunciator AN-5131 Windows


Display Unit & Engraving
Windows are available in five different Window Colors Available
The Ametek AN-5131 Annunciator solid colors to easily differentiate • White
Display is available in an unlimited groups of points by nature of the alarm. • Red
variety of configurations. This modular Operators quickly distinguish solid color • Amber
window annunciator is structured windows. • Green
around extruded aluminum cells. Each • Blue
cell can be divided to provide one, two,
The windows slide onto the front of the Engraving
three, or four windows and lamp
input card and can be quickly removed Fifteen different letter sizes are avail-
displays. This feature can also be used
and exchanged when you need to able. The chart below describes the
in the field to easily expand capacity by
internally expand the number of inputs or maximum number of lines and maxi-
changing per-cell displays to corre-
change your legend. mum number of characters per line for
spondingly smaller sizes. Windows are
available in an assortment of sizes and each letter size. The standard lettering
Each module has up to 8 bulbs to is in condensed gothic. Many other
colors that can be mixed or matched in
provide lighting redundancy in any types of lettering and symbols are
any combination. Bezels and mounting
configuration or density. Double available.
hardware are provided for panel
intensity lighting is optional with eight
mounting. AN-5131 input options
bulbs per point on single input and four
include terminals or connectors.
bulbs per point on dual input modules.
Engraving Guidelines

Maximum Number of Lines Per Window Approximate Total Number


Character Extra Large Large Medium Standard of Characters Available
Size Inches Window Window Window Window on any Line
02 1/16 33 15 10 5 37
03 3/32 22 10 7 4 28
04 1/8 16 7 5 3 21
05 5/32 13 6 4 3 17
06 3/16 10 5 3 2 13
07 7/32 9 4 3 2 11
Pushbutton Control Module 08 1/4 8 4 2 2 10
A Pushbutton Control Module is
09 9/36 7 3 2 1 9
available which controls the remote
annunciator electronics by providing 10 5/16 6 3 2 1 8
pushbuttons for TEST, ACKNOWL- 11 11/32 5 2 1 1 7
EDGE, SILENCE and RESET functions.
12 3/8 5 2 1 1 7
13 13/32 5 2 1 1 6
14 7/16 4 2 1 1 6
15 15/32 4 2 1 1 5
16 1/2 4 2 1 1 5

Pushbutton Control Module — with switch


pad and power on LED

The Pushbutton Control Module


mounts integrally to the AN-5131
Annunciator Display Unit, usually
occupying the lower right hand cell.

2.24
1.67"
(42.42mm)

3.34"
(84.48mm)

2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)
Single-point window (extra large) Two-point windows (large)

.83"
1.11" (21.25mm)
(28.3mm)

2.85" 2.85"
(72.39mm) (72.39mm)

Three-point windows (medium) Four-point windows (standard)

2.25
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-5131 Dimensions
& Connections
19" Rack Mounting
The standard configuration is 6 cells
wide. It is recommended that systems
less than 6 cells wide be ordered with Typical Rack Mounting Front View
.70
a bezel. (STD/2 Option) (17.8)
E

Mounting Depth: 4.5" (114.3 mm) D

Mounting Information
A B C D E F
.859 2.609 3.469
1H
(21.8) (66.2) (88.0)
C
1.484 5.434 6.969
2H
(37.7) (139.3) (177.0)
1.484 3.734 6.734 8.984 10.469
Number of Cells High

3H
(37.7) (94.8) (171.0) (228.2) (265.9) F

1.484 5.484 8.484 12.484 13.969


4H
(37.7) (139.3) (215.5) (317.1) (354.8)
1.484 5.484 11.984 15.984 17.469 B
5H
(37.69) (149.3) (304.4) (406.0) (443.7)
1.484 5.484 15.484 19.484 20.969 10.484
6H
(37.69) (139.29) (393.29) (494.9) (532.61) (266.29)
1.484 5.484 18.984 22.984 24.469 12.484
7H
(37.69) (139.29) (482.19) (583.79) (621.51) (317.09)

A
The mounting information shown above provides support
locations depending on the number of cells the system is high. O.O
(distance from 0.0 reference.)

Side View Rear View

WIRING
DUCT

Note: Wiring Duct


supplied on both
†→
sides for 3 cell high
systems and larger.

Optional
← Connector
Bracket 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2.26
Panel Mounting Panel Mounting
All mounting dimensions are based on Depth Behind Panel:
the number of cells, not windows. 4.5" (114.3 mm) maximum.
Each cell can be divided into up to 4
windows.

Dimensions are in inches with millime-


ters in parentheses ( ).

NUMBER OF CELLS WIDE

1W 2W 3W 4W 5W 6W 7W 8W 9W 10W 11W 12W 13W 14W 15W

Bezel 5.26 8.17 11.08 13.99 16.90 19.83 22.74 25.65 28.56 31.47 34.38 37.29 40.20 43.11 46.02
Width (133.6) (207.5) (281.6) (355.3) (429.3) (503.7) (577.6) (651.5) (725.4) (799.3) (873.2) (947.1) (1021.1) (1094.9) (1168.9)

Cutout 4.01 6.92 9.83 12.74 15.65 18.56 21.47 24.38 27.29 30.20 33.11 36.02 38.93 41.84 44.75
Width (101.9) (175.8) (249.7) (323.6) (397.5) (471.4) (545.3) (619.3) (693.2) (767.1) (840.9) (914.9) (968.8) (1062.7) (1136.6)

NUMBER OF CELLS HIGH

1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H

Bezel 5.75 9.15 12.56 15.97 19.37 22.77 26.17 29.58 32.99 36.4 39.80 43.20 46.50 50.00 53.40
Height (146.0) (233.0) (319.0) (405.6) (492.0) (578.3) (664.7) (751.3) (837.9) (924.5) (1011.2) (1097.8) (1184.4) (1271.0) (1357.6)

Cutout 4.50 7.90 11.30 14.70 18.10 21.50 24.90 28.30 31.70 35.10 38.50 41.90 45.30 48.70 52.10
Height (114.3) (200.7) (287.0) (373.4) (459.7) (546.1) (632.5) (718.8) (805.2) (891.5) (978.2) (1064.8) (1151.4) (1238.0) (1324.6)

Note: Consult factory for displays beyond 15 high x 15 wide.

BEZEL WIDTH
CUTOUT WIDTH

CUTOUT BEZEL
HEIGHT HEIGHT

2.27
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-5131 Dimensions
& Connections

General Outline — Front View

General Outline — Rear View

SHOWN WITHOUT
OPTIONAL DISPLAY
REAR COVER

Optional
← Connector
Bracket

2.28
Display Cell Input Wiring
Connections

TB1 TB1
1 INPUT 1 1 INPUT 1
2 2
3 3 INPUT 2
4 4
5 +24 VDC 5 +24 VDC
6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING 6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING

1 INPUT 2 INPUTS

TB1 TB1
1 INPUT 1 1 INPUT 1
2 INPUT 2 2 INPUT 2
3 3 INPUT 3
4 INPUT 3 4 INPUT 4
5 +24 VDC 5 +24 VDC
6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING 6 LAMP TEST OR DIMMING

3 INPUTS 4 INPUTS

2.29
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-5131 NEMA
Panel Covers
For applications where panel NEMA Front Cover (NFC) Options
mounted annunciation in hostile
Approximate Dimensions
environments is required, NEMA 4/
12 panel covers are recommended.
Cell Format H L
Many standard sizes are available.
To help choose the panel cover that
best meets your needs, please 1 high x 3 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
consult the adjacent chart. x 4 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 8.94" (227.0 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
2 high x 2 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 12.34" (313.4 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
3 high x 3 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 5 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 20.71" (526.0 mm)
x 6 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 7 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 26.53" (673.8 mm)
x 8 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 12 wide 15.74" (399.8 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
4 high x 2 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 11.98" (304.3 mm)
x 3 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)
x 6 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 23.62" (599.9 mm)
x 8 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 29.44" (747.8 mm)
x 9 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 32.35" (821.7 mm)
x 12 wide 19.14" (486.1 mm) 41.08" (1043.4 mm)
5 high x 3 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 14.89" (378.2 mm)
x 4 wide 22.54" (572.5 mm) 17.80" (452.1 mm)

Standard depth is 1.60" (40.6 mm)

NOTE: Please consult factory for certified drawings and for other available sizes.

1.60"
(40.6mm)

H
Hinged NEMA 4/12
Panel Mount Covers
The panel cover is constructed of 16
gauge, cold-rolled steel with a textured
black finish. The corners are sealed by
a neoprene sponge gasket and the L
window is 1/8" thick plexiglass.
Adjustable grip latches secure the
hinged cover to the mounting plate.

2.30
AN-5131 For Harsh
Environment 11.75"
(298.4mm)
NEMA Enclosures
Three standard NEMA 4/12 type
surface mount enclosures are available:
a 12 cell model (3H x 4W), an 8 cell
model (4H x 2W) and a 4 cell model
(4H x 1W). All housings are oil-tight,
water-tight, weather resistant and can
be equipped for purge applications.
Standard features include door- 20.00"
mounted pushbuttons. Available (508.0mm)
options include external audibles and
pushbuttons, and a common-alarm
rotating dome light. The rotating dome
light is designed to alert operators of
alarms in conditions where noise may
drown out audibles. It can be specified
in red, blue, amber, or green for either
integral or remote mounting.
16.00"
(406.4mm)

Surface Mount NEMA 4/12


Enclosure - 4H x 1W and 4H x 2W

12.68"
(322.1mm)

24.00"
(609.6mm)

20.00"
(508.0mm)

Surface Mount NEMA 4/12


Enclosure - 3H x 4W

2.31
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-5131 Specifications AN-5131 Ordering Each item has a unique order code
Input Signals (Alarm Signals): The model number of the AN-5131 which must be entered in its specific
Lamp inputs provided by remote consists of seven (7) items derived from location in the model number se-
annunciator electronics assembly, such the order codes listed below. When quence. The following is a tabulation of
as Ametek AN-6100R remote annun- ordering a system that includes any the order codes that must be used for
ciator system. “intermix” options (e.g. more than one each and every item of the standard
window color), an intermix order form model number.
Power Requirements: should be completed to fully define the
24 volt lamps, powered by remote annunciator display. If you have any
annunciator electronics system. questions, contact your nearest
Ametek sales office for assistance.
Controls (Integral or Remote):
A. Acknowledge pushbutton.
B. Silence pushbutton. AN-5131 - 1 x 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7
C. Test pushbutton. Number of Number of Window Active Window Standard Engraving
D. Reset pushbutton. Cells High Cells Wide Size Points Color Options

ORDER CODE FOR EACH ENTRY ITEM


Packaging:
Extruded aluminum cell with inter-
changeable plug-in modules. Item 1 Item 6
The order code defines the number of Order
Ambient Temperature Range: cells high. Code Standard Options
32°F to 140°F, 0°C to 60°C. NR None required
Item 2 STD/1 19" rack mounting,
Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing. The order code defines the number of 1 - 12H x 6W only
cells wide. STD/2 19 inch bezel rack
Window Sizes: mounting
A. 0.83" x 2.85" (21.25 x 72.39mm), Item 3 STE Cover for rear terminals
standard. Order STG-1* Sonalert (steady)
B. 1.11" x 2.85" (28.3 x 72.39mm), Code Window Size mounted in a cell
medium. 4 Standard, 4 per cell STG-2* Sonalert (pulsing)
C. 1.67" x 2.85" (42.42 x 72.39mm), 3E Medium, 3 per cell, field mounted in a cell
large. expandable STH* Silence/acknowledge/rest/
D. 3.34" x 2.85" (84.84 x 72.39mm), 2E Large, 2 per cell, field expandable test pushbuttons
extra large. 1E Extra large, 1 per cell, field mounted in a cell
expandable NFC Reference page 2.53 for
Weight: 1.68 lbs (0.76 kg) per cell. LED LED display, 4 per cell dimensions
FC Future cell, provided with an STY Integral plug connector -
extra large size, matching up to 32 points per plug
window (module and lamps DMR Dim resistors -
not included) applied per cell only
IMW Intermix window size TSD Test diodes -
applied per cell only
Item 4
Active Point — define total number of * Location must be defined by complet-
equipped or active points. ing the intermix matrix form.

Item 5 NOTE: Any model number containing


Order IMW or IMC designations requires an
Code Window Color intermix matrix order form.
W White
R Red Item 7
A Amber Order
G Green Code Engraving
B Blue Y Engraving provided by
LED LED Ametek
IMC Intermix window color NR Engraving not required
Refer to Intermix Matrix Order Form on
page 2.23 for location.

2.32
AN-6150 Modular
Annunciator
Display Unit
• Low Cost Visual Display

• Configurable in 4 Standard
Window Sizes

• Laser Printed Legends

• Easy Installation and


Maintenance.

The Model AN-6150 is a compact,


cellular display unit which allows a
wide variety of customer
configurations. Any combination of AN-6150 Specifications
four standard window sizes can be
accommodated in each cell. These Construction Connections
cells can be configured in any matrix Modular interlocking matrix configuration, Ribbon cable or Terminal Block
up to 4 high and 4 wide. The single multiples of standard DIN size 72mm x accepting maximum wire size 16 AWG.
module is designed to DIN 2.84" x 144mm (2.83 in. x 5.67 in.) cells up to 4
5.67" standard. cells high by 4 cells wide. Ambient Working Temperature
14ºF to 122ºF ( -10ºC to 50ºC)
The AN-6150 Modular Display Unit is Mounting
suitable for panel mounting. Six Flush panel mount or standard 19 inch Recommended Working Voltage
window colors are available which can rack panel mount for 3 cell wide 24 volts ±10% for increased lamp life
be back lighted by incandescent display only. with 28 volt lamp.
lamps. Alternatively, LED cluster lamps
are available to meet long life require- Window Sizes Power Requirements
ments. Legends are laser printed on Four standard sizes. Each cell has a total of 8 plug-in filament
clear transparencies to allow changes Small 0.98" x 1.14" (25mm x 29mm) lamps or LED clusters.
to be done by the customer. Medium 0.98" x 2.40" (25mm x 61mm)
Pushbutton membrane switches can Large 2.13" x 2.40" (54mm x 61mm) Power required per cell: 28 volt lamp
also be added for Silence, Test, Ex Large 2.13" x 4.96" (54mm x 126mm) working at 24 volts – 0.5 Amp, 12 watts
Acknowledge and Reset functions.
Window Colors 24 Volt LED cluster working at 24 volts –
These units come standard with flush Red, Amber, Yellow, Green, Blue, White 0.2 Amp, 4.8 watts
panel mounting brackets and terminal illuminated by incandescent lamps.
block connections. Please refer to Control Module
ordering information for additional Red, Amber, Green illuminated by LED SILENCE, TEST, ACKNOWLEDGE and
options. clusters. RESET membrane pushbuttons within a
large size window (54mm x 61mm – 1/2
Legends cell size) (2.13 in x 2.40 in) including
Laser printed on clear film or engraved internal audible device and visual power-
filters. Secret window until lit and secret on indicator.
legends optional.
Weight
Illumination 0.48 lbs (0.22 Kg) per cell.
#656 wedge type bulb, long life, 28 volt,
0.06 Amp filament lamp or equivalent. Maintenance
Dual lamps in all window sizes. Dual Access to all window elements is
lamps are optional in small window size. available from the panel front using only a
small screwdriver.
Optional illumination by LED cluster each
24 volt, 0.025 Amp with limited colors
Agency Approvals
(see Window Colors).
CSA approved for ordinary locations. FM
approval for ordinary locations pending.

2.33
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-6150 Dimensions
Legend Lettering Sizes
Window Size
25 x 29mm ÷ 8 25 x 61mm ÷ 4 54 x 61mm ÷ 2 54 x 126mm÷1
Size 2 no. of lines 6 6 14 14
chars per line 14 30 30 62
Size 3 no. of lines 4 4 9 9
chars per line 10 20 20 22
Size 4 no. of lines 3 3 7 7
chars per line 7 15 15 31
Size 5 no. of lines 2 2 5 5
chars per line 6 12 12 24
Size 6 no. of lines 2 2 5 5
chars per line 5 10 10 21
Size 7 no. of lines 2 2 4 4
chars per line 4 9 9 19

Single Unit and


Window (Actual
Sizes)

SIZE 7
SIZE 6 ÷4 .98" x 2.40"
(25mm x 61mm)
SIZE 5
SIZE 4
SIZE 3 ÷8
SIZE 2 ÷2 .98" x 1.14"
(25mm x 29mm)
2.13" x 2.40"
(54mm x 61mm)

2.84" x 5.67"
(72mm x 144mm)
DIN Unit

BEZEL WIDTH W
Number of Cells Wide “W”
1 2 3 4 4 WIDE
Bezel 5.67 10.79 5.91 21.02 3 WIDE HIGH
Width (144) (274) (404) (534)
2 WIDE
Cutout 5.43 10.55 15.67 20.79
Width (138) (268) (3980 (528) 1 WIDE

Number of Cells High “H”


1 2 3 4 4 HIGH
Bezel 2.83 5.12 7.40 9.68
Height (72) (130) (188) (246)
3 HIGH
Cutout 2.60 4.88 7.17 9.45 BEZEL
Height (66) (124) (182) (240) HEIGHT
H 2 HIGH

1 HIGH

2.34
AN-6150 Dimensions (standard rack mounting adapters)
Overall Depth: 2.24" (57mm)
19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm)) 15.67"
(398mm)

1.48" 1.31"
(37.7mm) (33.2mm)

2.25" 5.22"
(57.2mm) 1 HIGH 2.60"
(66.0mm) (132.5mm)

WIDE SLOTS (TYP)


.28" (7.0mm)

19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.50" 1.04"
(38.0mm) (26.5mm)

3.98"
(101.0mm)
2 HIGH 4.88"
(124.0mm) 6.97"
(177.0mm)

WIDE SLOTS (TYP)


.28" (7.0mm)

19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.48" 1.65"
(37.7mm) (42.0mm)

7.17"
7.5"
(190.5mm) 3 HIGH (182.0mm)

10.47"
(266.0mm)

WIDE SLOTS (TYP)


.28" (7.0mm)

19.02"
.35" (483mm)
(9mm) 18.31"
1.67" (465mm)
(42.5mm) 15.67"
(398mm)
1.48" 1.38"
(37.7mm) (35.1mm)

3.5"
(88.9mm)

2.25"
(57.2mm) 4 HIGH 9.45"
(240.0mm)

10.47"
3.5" (266.0mm)
(88.9mm)

+.010
xx =
-.000
WIDE SLOTS (TYP)
.28" (7.0mm)

2.35
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-6150 Ordering
Information

AN-6150 1— 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — 7
Item 7
Item 1 Standard Options. Indicates require-
Defines number of cells high. Not to ments of any additional options. Please
exceed 4. specify from list below.
NR None Required
Item 2 STD 19" rack mount panel
Defines number of cells wide. Not to (3 cell wide only)
exceed 4. 1 cell high
2 cells high
Item 3 3 cells high
Defines the window size. Enter one of 4 cells high
the following: STH Integral pushbuttons for
S Small 0.98" x 1.14" SILENCE, TEST,
(25mm x 29mm) ACKNOWLEDGE, and RESET,
M Medium 0.98" x 2.40" located in bottom right hand
(25mm x 61mm) cell.
L Large 2.13" x 2.40" RCA Ribbon cable assembly, 6 ft. long
(54mm x 61mm) (medium window size only)
EL X Large 2.13" x 4.96"
(54mm x 125mm) Notes:
IMW Intermixed window formats* 1. LED option not available with secret
window option.
Item 4 2. Integral pushbutton assembly not
Indicates type of lens assembly available with Extra Large (full cell)
VW Visible Window laser printed window.
SW Secret Window laser printed 3. Ribbon cable assembly not available
(Not available with LED with 1 cell wide array with or without
illumination) pushbuttons or 1 x 2 cell array with
VL Visible Legend engraved* pushbuttons.
SL Secret Legend engraved*

Item 5
Indicates type of illumination.
24C Incandescent lamps (24V)
24R LED array red (24V)
24A LED array amber (24V)
24G LED array green (24V)

Item 6
Indicates window color.
R Red
Y Yellow
G Green
A Amber
W White
B Blue (Not available with LED)
IMC Intermix colors*

*Specify

2.36
AN-3196B LED Stand Alone Annunciator Panel
The AN-3196B is a self-contained Mount
Annunciator 12-point annunciator that can alert
personnel locally through both flashing
12 INPUTS
• 12 Point, Fully Self-Contained LED's and external audible devices.
Annunciator This annunciator is a low cost method
of providing annunciator benefits to
• CSA Approved, remote locations.
Ordinary Locations

• FM Approved, Ordinary and


Division 2 Locations Annunciator Expansion Additional Points For Existing
(AC horn only) The reflash output relays on the Annunciator Systems
AN-3196B can be used to combine
• Expands Existing Annunciators up to 12 new inputs to alarm a
Through Two Reflash Outputs single full-size window of an
existing annunciator. Reflash UP
• Isolated Inputs RO
can be used to add additional

G
12 INPUTS

H
AS
points to non-expandable

FL
RE
• Fully Field Switch Programmable annunciators and when it is
undesirable to reduce the MAIN PANEL ANNUNCIATOR
• AC/DC Field Contact Voltage window size on an internally
expandable annunciator.
• Available in Panel Mount,
Surface Mount or NEMA
Enclosure

• MODBUS Communications Remote Monitoring with Reflash Multiple Remote Units With Output
Option The AN-3196B can provide detailed To Main Panel Annunciator
alarm data to local personnel
The AN-3196B is a self contained, and reflash the alarms to a
compact LED annunciator with control room annunciator. The CRITICAL REFLASH GROUP

reflash capability. It can be used as a reflashed data often provides NON-CRITICAL REFLASH GROUP

stand-alone annunciator or to sufficient general information


enhance or expand other about alarms occurring at
annunciators. remote locations for operators MAIN PANEL ANNUNCIATOR
to react properly, and detailed
This model offers dependable indica- alarm data is available on the REMOTE
ANNUNCIATOR #1
tion of alarms via red LEDs with AN-3196B LED display if
adjacent descriptive legend plates. required. Cost savings are
Each unit comes complete with 12 realized through the reduction
inputs, integral control push buttons, in wiring and control room REMOTE
power supplies, output relays for annunciator size. ANNUNCIATOR #2

reflash to another annunciator, and


audible alarming capabilities.
Multiple Remotes With Outputs To
Multiple Remotes to One One Common Annunciator Window
Common Window
Multiple AN-3196Bs
can be linked together
by using a reflash
output from one unit
A A A
as an input to another. B B
OUTPUT TO
B COMMON
IINPUTS
INPUTS

INPUTS

The last AN-3196B ANNUNCIATOR


can reflash the alarm WINDOW

data from all of the


units to a single
window in a control
room annunciator.

2.37
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-3196B Dimensions
& Connections
Panel Mount TOP VIEW
.62"
(15.7mm)

3.48" 3.73"
(88.4mm) (94.74mm)

PANEL CUTOUT FRONT VIEW


5.87"
(149.1mm) 3.80" 4.00"
±.03 (101.6mm)
(96.5mm)

13.96"
13.12" (354.6mm)
±.12
(333.3mm)
12.95"
(329mm)

.50"
SIDE VIEW (12.7mm)
(TYP.)

Surface Mount
0.75"
(19.1mm)
4.00" 8.90"
(101.6mm) (226.1mm)

9.00"
(228.6mm)
15.88"
(403.4mm)

.125" R. TYP.
(3.2mm)

.343" TYP.
(8.71mm)

4.40"
.437" DIA. TYP. (111.8mm)
(11.1mm)

2.40" 0.80" SIDE VIEW


(60.9mm) (20.3mm)

BACK VIEW

2.38
AN-3196B Dimensions
& Connections

NEMA 4/12 Enclosure

.437" DIA., TYP.


(11.1mm) SECTION B-B

.62" 10.00" 3.00" TYP.


(15.75mm) (254.0mm) (76.2mm) 11.75"
1.25" (298.45mm)
B
(31.75mm)
10.00"
(254.0mm)

TEST

OPTIONAL
RELAY
SIL 22.50"
(571.5mm)

21.25"
20.00" (539.8mm)
(508.0mm)
ACK

RESET

.437" (254.0mm) B OPTIONAL


(2 PLS.) AUDIBLE DEVICE
16.00"
(406.4mm)

2.39
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
EXTERNAL TB 2 TB 1
REMOTE FIELD CONTACT CONNECTIONS
PUSHBUTTONS INTERNALLY SUPPLIED FCV

SIL 1 SILENCE 1
FC 1
ACK 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 2 FC 2

FCV
RES 3 RESET VA
+24 VDC
250 mA 4 PUSHBUTTON/AUDIBLE VOLTAGE 3
FC 3
TEST 5 TEST 4 FC 4

FCV
CRIT 6 VB
CRITICAL
REFL 7 REFLASH 5
OUT FC 5
OUT 8 6 FC 6
* AUDIBLE FCV
DEVICE NON-CRIT 9 VC
FOR 24 VDC NON-CRITICAL
REFL 10 REFLASH 7
OUT FC 7
OUT 11 8 FC 8

FCV
AUD COM 12 AUDIBLE OUT COMMON VD

CRIT AUD 13 CRITICAL AUDIBLE OUT 9


FC 9
14 24V RETURN 10 FC 10

RBK/ 15 RINGBACK/ FCV


VE
NON-CRIT NON-CRITICAL AUDIBLE
L (+) PWR 16 POWER (+ FOR DC, L FOR AC) 11
FC 11
N (–) PWR 17 POWER (– FOR DC, N FOR AC) 12 FC 12

FCV
18 VF

BOTH AUDIBLES
SHOWN TIED TOGETHER.
MAY BE EITHER/OR. NOTE: FIELD CONTACTS MAY BE ANY
COMBINATION OF NO OR NC.
* FOR OTHER AUDIBLE DEVICES
REF DWG 1072-030

TB 1
FIELD CONTACT CONNECTIONS
EXTERNALLY SUPPLIED FCV
CONNECTIONS TB 2 FC 1
FOR OPTIONAL AUTOMATIC
1
REFLASH (AR) OPERATION**
2
SIL 1 SILENCE FC 2
VA
ACK 2 FC 3
3
3
4
+24 VDC 4 PUSHBUTTON/AUDIBLE VOLTAGE FC 4
VB
FC 5
5
AUD COM 12 AUDIBLE OUT COMMON
6
CRIT AUD 13 CRITICAL AUDIBLE OUT FC 6
VC
FC 7
7
RBK/ 15 RINGBACK/
NON-CRIT NON-CRITICAL AUDIBLE 8
FC 8
VD
FC 9
9

10
CUSTOMER WIRING VE
FC 10

FC 11
INTERNAL WIRING
11

12
FC 12
– +
RET
NEUTRAL LINE

** Recommended configuration for remote AN-3196B reflash output to main


annunciator, where audible function in remote location is not required. This NOTE: OTHER CONFIGURATIONS AVAILABLE.
hook-up is not compatible with audible device hook-up shown in above CONTACT FACTORY OR LOCAL REP FOR MORE
diagram. INFORMATION.

2.40
AN-3196B Specifications Sequence Selection:
Input Signals: Chose from 9 available sequences by
NO or NC contacts, switch selectable DIP switch selection. Only one se-
quence can be selected at any given
Output: time for all 12 alarm points. The 9
A. LED indicator per point available sequences are listed under
B. Audible and Reflash Output Relay Ordering, Item 1 and are defined on
Contacts rated at: Page 2.15.
5 amperes at 24 VDC or
120 VAC resistive
3 amperes at 120 VAC resistive
Legend Plate
C. Optional remote mounted audible Engraving Sizes
devices
D. 24 VDC @ .25 A available for Maximum # Maximum # of
driving audible device Letter Size of lines characters per Line
Ambient Temperature Range: 1/8" (3.2mm) 3 22
5/32" (4mm) 3 18
32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C)
3/16"(4.8mm) 2 14
Relative Humidity: 1/4" (6.4mm) 1 11
0% to 95% (non-condensing) Other sizes available upon request.
Power Source and Requirements:
A. 120 VAC: 120 VAC ± 10%, 50-
60Hz at 100 mA maximum AN-3196B Ordering
B. 240 VAC: 240 VAC ± 10%, 50-60Hz The AN-3196B is supplied in the following versions, stocked and immediately
at 50 mA maximum available from the factory. Individual model numbers are defined by the following fill-
C. 125 VDC: 105 VDC to 140 VDC at in items:
100 mA maximum
D 24 VDC: 20 VDC to 28 VDC at AN-3196B- 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7
400 mA maximum Sequence Prime Field Contact Audible Reflash Enclosure Communications
E. 48 VDC: 44 VDC to 52 VDC at Power Voltage Options
250 mA maximum
Item 1 Sequence
Terminals: Chose from these available sequences: Item 4 Audible Options
Screw Barrier type A FFAM2 *SNS Sonalert Steady Tone
12 AWG wire maximum F2M-1 A-4 Remote Mount
Controls: M R12 *SNP Sonalert Pulsing
Integral Test, Acknowledge, Silence F1A F2A Remote Mount
and Reset pushbuttons F3A A4 HAC 120 VAC Remote Horn
R HDC 24 VDC Remote Horn
Field Contact Voltage:
HDH 125 VDC Remote Horn
A. Isolated, internally supplied 125 VDC
Item 2 Prime Power NR Not Required
or 24 VDC for 48 VDC, 125 VDC,
F 24 VDC *Audible device not integrally mounted
120/240 VAC Prime Power
E 48 VDC in NEMA 4/12 enclosure.
B. Non-isolated, internally supplied
C 125 VDC
24 VDC for 24 VDC prime power or
B 120 VAC Item 5 Reflash Option
48 VDC for 48 VDC prime power
A 240 VAC AR Automatic Reflash
C. Isolated externally supplied 125 VDC,
MR Manual Reflash (Standard)
48 VDC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC
Item 3 Field Contact Voltage
Enclosures: Internally Supplied Item 6 Enclosure
General purpose standard panel or D 125 VDC PM Panel Mount
surface mount enclosures. X 24 VDC SM Surface Mount
Labeling: T 48 VDC 4WM Wall mount, NEMA 4
Black lamacoid legend plates with Customer Supplied SCM Series Contact Monitor Inputs
white lettering for each point, plus one D/C 125 VDC Isolated
for unit identification (see engraving X/C 24 VDC Isolated Item 7 Communications
information) T/C 48 VDC Isolated Port 1 Serial Modbus
Y/C 120 VAC Isolated
Isolation: 1700 VDC
Surge Withstand Capability (SWC):
Test conforms to ANSI /IEEE C37.90.1-
1989 (oscillatory) and IEC 801-4 Level 2
Weight: 9 lbs. (4.09 kg) Panel Mount
53 lbs. (24 kg) in NEMA Enclosure

2.41
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
SM-100U Substation SM-100U Connections
Monitor

• 12 Point Annunciator
ON TB 2 ON TB 2
• High Reliability in Severe TB 1 OFF
TEST 1
TB 1 OFF
1
TEST
Temperature Conditions 1 1
2 2

• Simple Operation 2
3
2
3

4 4

• Individual Reset Per Point

• 125 VDC or 48 VDC 23 23


12 12
24 24

The SM-100U is a compact, self- 13


STANDARD
13

contained substation annunciator MODEL MODEL 8752


providing 12 points of alarms. This + 14 + 14

model is supplied with all lamps and POWER POWER


name plates, operation control – 15 – 15
switches, and an output for
communicating to a SCADA system.

Automatic locking of alarm


conditions along with complete
ON TB 2
redundant output relays provide the TB 1
ON
OFF
TB 2
TB 1 OFF
1
optimum in remote substation 1
TEST 1
1
TEST

annunciator applications. 2 2

3 3
2 2

4 4

23 23
12 12
24 24

13 13

MODEL 9191 MODEL 0724

+ 14 + 14

POWER POWER RESET


– 15 – 15

ON TB 2
TB 1 OFF TB1=12 Normally Open Alarm
TEST 1
1 Contacts
2

2
3 Relay Contacts Are Shown In
4 De-Energized (Normal) State

TB2=12 Normally Open Auxiliary


23 Contacts For Use With Supervisory,
12
24 Audible, Or Visual Indicator

13

MODEL 9600
+ 14

POWER RESET
– 15

2.42
SM-100U Dimensions Ambient Temperature Range: SM-100U Ordering
-30°F to 140°F (-34°C to 60°C) Specify each item:
KNOCKOUT
FOR 1"
CONDUIT 5.31 Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing
(ONE EACH 5.00
Item 1 – Model Number
END) 1.50
4.20 Isolation : 600 VAC or 1000 VDC SM100U for 125 VDC power
1.00
Input to case, output to case, input to SM100UA for 48 VDC power
PANEL CUT-OUT OPTIONAL
DIMENSIONS 4.00 ANGLE
CLAMPS
output.
(1/8 ANGLE BRACKET) Item 2 – Legends
_ 1/64
17 5/16 x 5 3/8 + Surge Withstand Capability (SWC):
Specify legends engraved or blank, and
PANEL Conforms to ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-
options as desired.
.254 DIA. (4 HOLES)
7.00
5.625
1989
(FOR WALL MOUNT) BEZEL

1/8 TYP. Field Connections: Item 3


Terminal block with #6 screws. Optional Operation Sequences
12 AWG wire maximum. STD Auxiliary contacts latched until
reset
Dimensions:
17.00
5.625"W x 17.00"H x 4.00"D 8752 Auxiliary contacts follow field
19.00
PANEL (14.29 cm x 43.18 cm x 10.16 cm) contacts
15.00 MOUNT
(RMA 9191 Auxiliary contacts latched until
4.656
STANDARDS)
Weight:: 9 lbs. 13 oz. ( 4.45 kilos) reset and alarm clears
17.375
WALL Mounting: 9600 Common reset, auxiliary
MOUNT
Wall mount or panel mount is available contacts latched until reset,
auxiliary contacts activated
6.171
Labeling: on test
Black lamacoid legend plates with 0724 Common reset, auxiliary
TEST OFF ON white engraved lettering. Each plate is contacts latched until reset,
1" x 2.5" overall. Up to 5 lines with 24
characters per line is possible using 1/
SM-100U Specifications 8" engraving. Please consult factory for
Input Signals: other various options on engraving
Normally open alarm contacts supplied sizes.
with voltage from the positive side of
the station battery.

Output Signals:
Lighted lamps upon alarm status until
manually reset. Individual auxiliary relay
contacts.

Operating Voltage: 125 VDC or 48


VDC

Power Dissipation:
6 Watts @ 125 VDC per point
2.2 Watts @ 48 VDC per point
0 Watts during standby

Lamps:
Telephone type 24 ESB, operated at
reduced voltage for 50,000 hour life.

Relays:
Contact rating is 5A at 24 VDC, 0.1A
at 125 VDC

Sequence of Operation

Field Alarm
Condition Contacts Switch Lamp Auxiliary Contacts

Normal Open On Off Open


Alarm Closed On On Closed
Return to Normal Open On On Closed
Reset Open Off Off Open

2.43
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
AN-6100R Remote Modules Available
Outputs can be wired to the Ametek 8 point I/O module – 8 contact inputs
Annunciator display units, AN-5131 or AN-6150 and 8 lamp driver outputs.
(see separate display section for the 16 point input module – 16 contact inputs.
benefits of each of these) or can be 8 point AC input module – 8 AC
wired direclty to any existing annuncia- contact inputs.
tor display. The electronics can be 8 point line monitor – 8 contact
located up to 100 meters from the inputs and verifies condition of
display. input wiring.
8 point analog module – 8 each 4-20
Configuration ma inputs.
• Remote electronics The AN-6100R can consist of almost 16 point output module – 16 open
• User configurable any point definition and window display collector outputs (NPN sink).
• Field expandable requirement. Simply choose the proper 16 point output modules – 16 open
• Full ISA sequences number of modules to perform all of collector outputs (PNP source).
• Analog and contact inputs the input, grouping, audibles, repeat 16 point output module – 16 reed relay
• Full grouping capabilities relays, first out groupings, and window contacts NO or NC.
• MODBUS Serial Output display drivers to fulfill the application. 8 point output module – 8 reed relay
• OPC Server contacts NC or NO.
Almost any combination of modules
5 point output module – 5 power
This annunciator provides the maximum can be used to perform the following
in system flexibility and user controlled relay outputs.
on a per chassis basis:
configuration packaged in rack or panel
mount chassis. All functional electronics – 128 contact inputs or 32 analog inputs Remote Unit Specifications
are enclosed in these chassis supporting – combinations of contact and digital Electrical Characteristics
true remote applications where the (1 analog = 4 contact) Power Requirements:
electronics must be separate from the – 128 individual lamp driver outputs 24 VDC, 48 VDC, 125 VDC ± 12%
annunciator window displays. The – 112 individual repeat relay outputs 115/230 VAC ± 10% 50/60 Hz
electronics is so versatile that it can – 16 individual audible outputs
also be mounted directly at the display – 16 separate first out groupings Input Current:
location supporting almost any – 16 separate reflash grouping outputs approximately 2 mA per input
annunciator application. – 16 separate voting/logic grouping
outputs Environmental
The AN-6100R electronics can be used Operating Temperature:
in conjunction with existing displays, or Larger systems are accomplished by 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
a full line of Ametek annunciator simply combining multiple chassis
together. Storage Temperature:
displays can be provided.
-13º to 185ºF (-25 to 85ºC)
System Operation Configuration is accomplished via a
The AN-6100R utilizes remote electron- DOS or Windows™ based PC through Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing
ics packaged in a compact rack mount a standard RS232 port. The onboard
Contact Inputs: NO or NC, field
or panel mount chassis. Each chassis program allows updating the
selectable by DIP switch on a per point
includes a CPU which controls all of the configuration directly in the field.
functionality per chassis. There are two basis.
chassis available; single unit which Typical System Field Contact Voltage:
accepts up to 10 I/O modules and a 24, 48, 125 VDC, isolated and non-
dual chassis which accepts up to isolated, 120 VAC isolated
23 I/O modules.
LOCAL Analog Inputs: 4-20 mA
System configuration can be customized ANNUNCIATOR
PANELS
at the factory and can be easily edited in INPUTS
UP TO 128 DIGITAL Input Capacity: 128 digital inputs per
the field using a DOS based PC through UP TO 32 ANALOG
AND COMBINATIONS RU or 32 analog inputs per RU or
a standard RS232 port. Almost any UP TO
UP TO 100
1500METERS
METERS (PER REMOTE)
combinations of both.
configuration can be accomplished
including single point windows, multiple
REMOTE UNIT Response Time: 40 millisecond.
window displays, first out groupings and
reflash groupings plus more.
Outputs
Inputs can be either contact or 4-20ma Lamp Drive: 200 mA @24 VDC, 5 watts
analog with 128 contact inputs per
chassis, or 32 analog inputs per RS 232 CONFIGURATION
Reed Relay: 100 VDC @ 0.25 A max.
chassis, or a combination of both. One (Also serves as ASCII SPST, volts free NO/NC
text input from
analog replaces 4 contact inputs. remote devices such
as PLC or DCS). Power Relay:
24 VDC @ 2.0A
240 VAC @ 1.0 A
2.44
Alarm Sequence – Annunciator Flash Rates: on/off time adjustable Auto Delete from Scan:
Functions Any input can be removed from service
All ISA Sequences. Two sequences Push-button Controls: a total of 64 manually or automatically after a
per CPU available. Either sequence programmable as a combination of: predetermined number of alarms in a
can be assigned to any input point. Acknowledge set period of time occurs, preventing
First Out Acknowledge nuisance alarms.
Mechanical Characteristics Lamp Test
Single Chassis: Group Lamp Test Audibles:
5.5″H x 7.25″D x 19″W Full Functional Test 16 Alarm Audibles
Reset 1 Alarm Return to Normal
Double Chassis: Audible Silence
11.5″H x 7.25″D x 19″W Groups:
Output Capacity: up to 224 digital 16 Control Groups
Chassis Mounting: surface or rack outputs 16 Audible Groups
mount capability 16 Group Lamps
Output Assignment: 16 Group Relays
Terminals: all input/output modules All inputs can be assigned to any 16 Group Inhibits
have gold plated terminals. output, open collector, reed relay or 16 First Out Groups
power relay, or multiples of the same by 16 Voting Groups
Programmable Features use of the configurator program. 16 Logic Groups
Input Time Delay: 0.04 sec to 40 min Individual Point Inhibit:
(approx.) in 40 millisecond increments Software inhibit available for any alarm
point.

Single Chassis Block Diagram Boolean Logic:


Groups of inputs can activate an alarm
after certain and/or conditions are met.
MOTHER BOARD
Alarms can activate lamps or relay
outputs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Voting Logic:
R
C
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E Groups of inputs can activate an alarm
OR G
P
U RELAY MODULES U after voting conditions (2 out of 3, 4 out
L
AS REQUIRED A of 6, etc.) are met. Alarms can activate
T
O lamps or relay outputs.
R

Double Chassis Block Diagram

MOTHER BOARD
E
X
T
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 N
R D
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E E
C G R
P OR
RELAY MODULES U
U B
L
AS REQUIRED A U
T S
O
R

MOTHER BOARD

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES


OR
RELAY MODULES
AS REQUIRED

2.45
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
Mounting & Dimension
Single Chassis

7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL
7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"
(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283"
(185.0mm) 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
.098" (8.7mm)
(2.5mm)

5.126"
(132.5mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)

1.483"
(37.68mm)

.71"
(18.0mm)

Double Chassis

7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL

7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"


(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283" 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
(185.0mm) (8.7mm)
.098"
(2.5mm)

2.250"
(57.15mm)

7.500"
(190.5mm)

10.468"
(265.9mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)

1.483"
(37.68mm)

.71"
(18.0mm)

2.46
AN-6100R Ordering
Codes:
AN-6100R – 1 - 2 - 3 - 4(I/0) - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 9
Item 1 Remote Units = # of chassis required and size of each.
Remote unit - includes CPU & power regulator
available
description slots order code qty req.
single chassis rack mount 10 SR
single chassis panel mount 10 SP
dual chassis rack mount 23 DR
dual chassis panel mount 23 DP

Item 2
(Defined by the # of outputs) Prime power = level and quantity of supplies required.
order code qty req.
125 vdc C
115 vac B
24 vdc F
48 vdc E
100 watts = 30 outputs & 180 watts = 60 outputs
125 vdc and 115 vac provided in separate assembly.

Item 3
Field contact voltage (FCV) =# of supplies required if Ametek supplied and level for input
modules.
description order code qty req.
customer supplied 24 vdc CS24
customer supplied 48 vdc CS48
customer supplied 125 vdc CS125
customer supplied 115 vac CS115
AMETEK supplied 24 vdc X
AMETEK supplied 48 vdc T
AMETEK supplied 125 vdc D

Item 4 Modules = listing of all types of modules required


Input /output modules required
description order code qty req.
8 point I/O (DC only) A
8 point input (AC or DC) B
8 point input and line monitor (24 vdc) C
16 point input D
8 point analog input E
16 output - screw term, NPN sink F
16 output - ribbon, NPN sink G
16 output - screw term, PNP source H
8 output reed relay, NO, screw term I
8 ouptup reed delay, NC, screw term J
16 output reed relay, NO, ribbon K
16 output reed relay, NC, ribbon L
5 output power relay M
Note: total output points must equal system outputs including special relays and audibles.
Total number of inputs must equal system inputs plus four (test, ack, reset, silence) for control
pushbutton module required and one for power monitor. (Note: model # must show # of
input/outputs where I/O is shown.

2.47
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
Item 5 Sequences
Chose any two ISA Sequences: A, A4, M, R, F1A, F2M-1, F3A, R12.

Item 6 Cable = # of cables, termination, and length of cables (remote to display)


Cables required - remote unit to display
cable type order code qty feet
point - to - point with connector STY
point - to - point pig tail PT
Specify if more than one cable is required. List all cable distances.

Item 7 Control pushbutton module = determines if test, ack, reset, silence pushbuttons are
provided by Ametek.
Control Pushbutton Module Requirement
description order code qty
remote Ametek supplied STH
customer supplied CS
cable
Specify N/A if STH option is specified with individual displays provided by Ametek.
The same length cable will be supplied as specified above.

Item 8 Display = determines if a display is required. If yes then display model # must be provided.
Display (from AN6150 or AN5131 catalog section) use separate sheet if necessary, giving
description number.

Item 9 Miscellaneous
Example: Requirement calls for 28 contact inputs with individual windows in existing display. Prime
is 125vdc as is Ametek provided FCV. Push button panel should also be provided. No displays are
to be provided. Also requires one first out grouping and 4 separate group outputs plus 1 audible.

Appropriate model # AN6100R - 1SR - 1C - 1D - 5A (33/33) - F1A - NA - STH - N - N/A

1SR = 1 each single chassis


1C = 1 each 125vdc prime power supply
1D = 125 vdc Ametek supplied FCV
5A = 5 each 8 I/O modules (this includes the 4 inputs needed for test, ack, reset, silence and 1
input for power monitor).
33 inputs = 28 contact inputs + 4 for CSM and 1 for power monitor
33 outputs = 28 lamp drivers and reed relay outputs for groups and 1 audible
F1A = first out sequence, factory programmed
NA = no cables required
STH = Ametek provided common service module
N = no displays needed
N/A = no special notations

2.48
ISM-1
Integrated System
Monitor

Ametek Power Instruments, Inc.


— the pioneer in sequential
events recorders — proudly
presents the standard of excel-
lence and reliability: the ad-
vanced Integrated System
Monitor (ISM-1).

ISM-1. So advanced it’s simple!


Based on extensive interviews
with professionals in the electric
power industry RiS has utilized
advanced technology to design
this state-of-the-art system to
meet the four most important
needs in event recording sys-
tems: reliability, ease of service,
data integrity, and compact
design. The ISM-1, minimizes the
number of components and uses
low-power circuitry, redundant
logic power supplies, fiber optic Features and Benefits: • variety of Input Termination
interfaces, and redundant • fewer components to maximize Configurations, from 32 up to
reliability, save space, simplify 128 inputs or rack mounting for
connections. This achieves not higher density applications,
only unprecedented levels of service, and reduce retrofitting costs.
include optical isolators, initial
reliability, accuracy and efficiency input conditioning, and input
• integral, redundant logic power
but also simplifies installation and supplies are interchangeable between check circuitry.
maintenance to save considerable ECU and CIU and easily accessible
time and costs. (as are all circuit boards) for quick • modbus interface selectable as
replacement to save time and costs. RS-232 or RS-485
Significant retrofit savings in time,
material and manpower! Retrofit • hardware/software filters minimize
savings are significant with the false signals from noise and bounce, Cost-saving design meets the
ISM-1, which consists of: an Event eliminate false printouts, and improve industry’s four most important
Capture Unit (ECU), Communica- accuracy. needs in event recording systems.
tions Interface Unit (CIU), Field
• fiber optic links between ECU and • Unprecedented reliability
Contact Voltage power supply CIU eliminate ground loops, remove ECU Mean Time
(FVC), and Input Modules in a electromagnetic interference, Between Failures: 115 years
variety of mounting configurations. improving data integrity, saving wiring CIU MTBF: 67 years
time and costs. Input Board MTBF: 127 years

• CIU time sync capability accepts • Simplified Design for Easy


IRIG-B, pulse per time unit, or 50/60 Service fewer components, easy
Hz signals. access to plug-in modules

• CIU has optional status contacts, • Precise Data Integrity


communication ports, fiber optic “noise” filters and fiber optic
links. communications

• ECU and CIU have complete self- • Compact Versatility


diagnostics with system status microprocessor-based recorder
visible on front panel LEDs. only 1.75" x 19"
2.49
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording

ISM Specifications
Input Signals Normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contacts can be set on a per point
or group basis via remote printer/keyboard or computer.

Clock Accuracy 100 milliseconds per day typical with software correction, 100 milliseconds per day
with TCXO option over entire temperature range; ± 1 millisecond with IRIG-B.

Time Synchronization (CIU only) IRIG-B, AC-line, pulse per unit time standard.

Isolation Via optical couplers to provide isolation from input to output and power.
An optional isolated module provides isolation from input-to-input and accepts AC inputs.

RFI Tested per SAMA standards to PMC 33.1C-1978 class 2, band A, B, & C.

Di-electric Strength Conforms to IEEE/ANSI 313-1971/C37.90, 1500V DC input to ground.

Operating Temperature Range 0° to 60° Centigrade.

Field Contact Voltage (FCV) 24,48, 125, 250 volts DC, RiS or customer supplied —
or 120, 240 volts AC customer supplied; negative fcv also available.

Logic Power 20-60 or 95-300 VDC and 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz. 10 watts maximum per ECU or CIU.

Surge Withstand Capacity (SWC) Conforms to IEEE/ANSI 472-1974/C37.90a.

Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing.

Input/Output ECU:
Dual RS-232 ports, independently configured for baud rate, parity, X-ON/X-OFF,
and other parameters to support a wide variety of standard serial printers and keyboards.
The same data is sent to both ports.

CIU:
Selection of up to 14 of the following:
• SCM-P fiber optic module for interfacing with an ECU (up to 1000M).
• Relay Driver Module (RDM) provides four software-driven relay drivers (1 per system max).
• Dual RS-232 provides redundant and/or primary and backup output ports.
• IBM Interface provides a fixed-protocol interface for remote or local communication
to an IBM or compatible PC for in-depth data analysis using RiS software.
• CRT Annunciator provides interface and control for CRT annunciator
in control room applications.
• Distributed Control Systems provide fixed-protocol interface for a variety
of distributed control systems.
• Modbus interface to output to PLCs, AN-3100, RiSCue, or other devices.

2.50
Input Module

Compact, simple and advanced,


the Input Module saves installa-
tion/retrofit costs.

These compact Input modules


offer the widest alternatives, and
simplify installation to save time
and costs. The Input Termination
Panel (ITP) consists of an input
module and a choice of terminal
blocks. Panels (21"H x 19"W)
accommodate 32 or 64 inputs.

The standard input module includes


optical isolators, initial input condi-
tioning, and input check circuitry. Logic Power Supply
The input check function is a
detailed system test that verifies Redundant power, detailed visual watts, there is very little heat
both the on and off operation of the indicators, quick and easy module dissipation and heat stress on the
optical coupler and correct signal replacement. Here again is unsur- electronics, so reliability is im-
flow through the entire system. passed reliability. The Logic Power proved. And since no special
Supply includes redundant power cooling fans or vents are required,
Two other input modules are supplies with automatic bumpless problems associated with dust and
available. One is an AC input transfer. It also provides fast, debris are minimized.
module — which also accepts DC accurate diagnostic information
inputs — that provides isolation shown on the front panel LEDs. Visual control
from input to input utilizing two Dual sources, AC and DC, increase
terminals per point and indepen- reliability. Front panel indicators include four
dent optical isolators. The second LEDs that monitor input from each
is a negative Field Contact Voltage Simplicity power supply — giving you a quick
(common positive) board to indication of where any problem
compliment the standard common If either power supply fails, replace- may be. The front panel also holds
negative input board. ment is fast and simple. The power four quick-change fuses that
supply module is accessible from independently protects both power
A typical application using a stan- the front panel and can be re- supplies from each power source.
dard input panel allows 384 inputs in moved simply by loosening two
a single cabinet, or 768 inputs using thumb screws. Just slide out the Interchangeable
the high-density panels. For retrofit failed module and slide in a new
applications, there is a rack mount one. The same supply module is used in
card cage for the input module to both ECU and CIU, reducing spare
handle up to 512 inputs. Reliability parts stocking requirements.

Simple installation. For retrofit The power supply operates in a


applications, the input boards can variety of configurations, including
be connected to existing field AC/DC and DC/AC. Just select the
terminal blocks via ribbon cable operating range, from 20-60V or
connector at one end, and discrete 95-300V DC, along with 120/240V
wires at the other end. Other AC, 50/60Hz. Each of the two
options are available so existing power inputs is distributed to both
field wiring and terminal blocks can of the power supplies for added
be used, thus reducing installation reliability. Since the power supplies
time and manpower requirements. generate a maximum of only 10

2.51
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
ECU
Event Capture Unit
Unprecedented speed,
accuracy, reliability and
compact versatility.
The Event Capture Unit can be a
stand-alone sequence of events
recorder, or the front end of larger
systems. Since it is microprocessor
based and utilizes advanced technol-
ogy, it requires only 1.75" of standard
19" rack space and consumes less
than 5 watts of power.

The ECU supplies the required logic needed for each ECU. Fiber a personal computer, stored on
for either 128 or 256 inputs. All inputs optics also eliminate problems disk as an ASCII file, and down-
are simultaneously sampled every with ground loops, electromag- loaded to the ECU/CIU if desired
millisecond and can be configured for netic interference, and other — or they can be entered from a
normally open or normally closed. All “noise.” Links can be up to keyboard.
data is stored with one-millisecond 1000 meters, allowing remote
resolution regardless of how the mounting of ECUs and Terminal
system or per-point parameters are Panels. This can save thousands Dual Ports
configured. of dollars in material and labor
costs involved with laying The ECU includes a dual RS-232
The ECU samples the inputs and copper wire for each input, and port for both the input and output
controls the digital filtering. This using available equipment of data. Both ports can be
eliminates excessive recording caused space in various locations. configured for their own baud
by contact bounce, false recording rate, parity, and other parameters
caused by noise,and other problems. to support a variety of standard
In addition to a system “first hit” filter, Non-volatile memory printers and other output devices.
a per-point filter that can be set for 1 These ports, used with a key-
to 255 milliseconds is added to the After an input change-of-state is board/printer or terminal, can be
system-wide filter. To further eliminate recorded to 1 millisecond used to enter legends and access
nuisance or oscillating alarms, the resolution, it is stored in a non- the historical memory. To prevent
operator can program, on a per-point volatile, 1000-level (per ECU) unauthorized access, the user can
basis, to automatically delete points historical circular memory. This program a password to the
from scan, and automatically re-insert provides a buffer for the printer configuration commands to limit
them at a later time. and allows detailed analysis at a access to critical parameters.
later date. In addition to the
Fiber optic links are used to communi- historical memory, there is
cate from the ECU to the Communica- sufficient memory for 119
tions Interface Unit (CIU). These links are characters per point descrip-
serial data communications to reduce tion, that can be split into any
physical connections, which means combination of alarm and
major savings over copper-wired return-to-normal legends. The
systems. Only a single pair of fibers are legends can easily be typed into

2.52
CIU
Communications
Unit
Simple, compact,
efficient — with
advanced capabilities.
The CIU performs three major
functions: 1) communicates with
and time-sorts data from multiple
ECUs in systems with more than
256 inputs; 2) acts as a “smart”
interface to a variety of peripheral
devices; and 3) accepts external
time-synchronization signals. Versatility LED visual indicators
The CIU uses only 3.5 inches of The CIU has 14 card slots For a quick visual indication of
rack space and uses an identical controlled by the Master system operations, the CIU has
power supply as the ECU — thus Communications Processors. six front panel LEDs. The
reducing spare parts requirements. Additionally, there is a time indicators are for proper
To reduce downtime, its power keeper processor to provide operation of the internal clock,
supply is easily accessible. Power precise time synchronization. data transmitted and data
consumption is less than 10 watts, The slots can be used for any received, presence of external
so there is little heat dissipation for combination and type of modules time synchronization, and status
improved reliability. Also, all the offered. These include a Systems indicators for Alert conditions
connectors are either gold plated or Communications Module (SCM) and Fault conditions. The Alert
gas tight to minimize contact failure. for communicating to ECUs up to LED indicates low-level
1000 meters away. malfunctions, and the Fault
To output data to peripheral LED indicates a problem that
devices, a variety of modules are Multiple diagnostics may affect system operation or
available, including: RS-232 data integrity.
modules for printing, CRT or The CIU has both on-line
Lightbox Annunciators, Modbus, automatic and operator-initiated
IBM computers, and various diagnostics, and is constantly
distributed control systems; dual running a diagnostic routine to
RS-232 modules for redundant locate possible failures. Detailed
applications and cost-saving; and a diagnostics can be manually
relay driver module to expand the initiated or programmed to occur
number of relay driven outputs. on a selected time basis.
This relay module allows the Whatever routine is used, failures
operator to program up to four are output to the printer in plain
relays to trip when user-defined language descriptions; there are
conditions occur. no error codes to look up.

The CIU accepts any combination


of these modules with no
modification to its internal program.
This makes expansion and
changes as easy as adding
modules and configuring new
interfaces.

2.53
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
FCV
Field Contact
Voltage
The Field Contact Voltage (FCV)
power supply provides wetting
voltage for dry contact inputs and
performs input check and ground
detection. To support the wide
range of possible combinations,
this FCV power supply can be
configured for your powered
contacts, thereby supplying only
input check and ground detection.
It can be configured to supply
24, 48, 125 or 250V DC wetting Modbus Interfacing Reliable, Versatile, High
voltage for either 256 or 512 points,
MTBF
or 256 points with redundant power With the Modbus interface module,
the ISM-1 can interface with plant Reliability is the number one criteria in
supplies.
computers or PLCs to provide the design of Ametek Power
contact status information, Instruments’ events recorder. Every
The input check function, available
millisecond time tag data and system component, every connector, and
only with the DC input module, is a
date and time. This reduces the every piece of hardware was selected
detailed diagnostic routine that
need to wire the same contact into with the goal of achieving reliability
turns the optical coupler on and off
multiple systems reducing the overall orders of magnitude higher than any
to verify the proper operation of all
cost. Additionally, the system can be other events recorder. Virtually all
logic circuits and optical couplers.
interfaced to an RiS AN-3100 system operating parameters are
The ground detector provides an
equipped with a Modbus interface to programmable in the ISM-1, to tailor
LED and relay driver for indication
provide light box annunciation with the alarming and reporting to the
of ground faults. Plug-in connection
programmable sequences, reflash needs of different applications.
reduces the time needed to locate
capability and all the other features of Interfaces to printers, DCS systems,
ground faults.
the AN-3100. As with PLCs or plant CRT annunciator, and PC computers
computers, this provides overall provide the necessary data for
savings in reduced wiring. prompt response or analysis. A
variety of input filtering options
Included with the RiSCue software is reduces false reports from sensitive
the ability to take data from the ISM- or noise-generating equipment.
1 Modbus module and convert it to
standard OPC format. This simplifies
the process of getting the data from
the ISM-1 to your plant computer or
other OPC compliant systems.

2.54
DMS-2000
Distributed
Monitoring System

The DMS-2000 is a distributed Alarm Features • Group Inputs and Outputs (any
Monitoring System with all of the group of inputs can activate any
features of a Visual Annunciator • Field Contact Inputs (normally output lamp, relay, audible, etc)
System combined with the time open or closed) • Boolean Logic Outputs
tagging of events to 1 msec. One • Analog Inputs AND Voting Logic Outputs
wired input connection is all that you (4 adjustable trip points) • Selectable Input Filter Delay
need to gain both visual display and • Pushbutton Controls • Automatic delete from scan
sequence of events recording, (test, acknowledge, silence, • IRIG-B Time Synchronization
eliminating costly wiring and system reset) • 1000 Event Storage
maintenance. The DMS-2000 • Lamp Outputs per Remote Unit
presents your alarm information into for Annunciator Displays • All input, output and group
open interfaces, such as Serial • Repeat Relay Outputs configurations are factory
Modbus and OPC. This provides • Audible Alarm Relays configured and easily changed
instant connectivity into many different • All ISA Alarm sequences through our Windows based
applications, including PLC’s, DCS available, including First-Out configuration tool.
and HMI Software packages.

Get the Best of Both Worlds

1msec Sequence of Events Recording


Visual Annunciation

Instant Alarm Notification


2.55
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
System Architecture Annunciator Annunciator
Display Display

The DMS-2000 offers a flexible


building block design that can be
distributed throughout your plant. The
system consists of multiple Remote Horn
Units that provide input terminations
and logic for all analog and digital
inputs as well as lamp and relay
outputs. Each Remote Unit can be
installed wherever convenient; close to
the input wiring or close to the visual Outputs Outputs
Inputs
displays. We offer a full selection of
visual displays making it easy for you
to pick one that fits your application.

The Data Concentrator collects all of Remote Unit #1 Remote Unit #2 Remote Unit #16
the alarm information from up to16
Remote Units providing one common Up to 1200M
data source to your own application or
our Alarm Management Software,
RiSCue. The Data Concentrator
provides a common clock Time Stamped
External
synchronization to all Remote Units Serial Data
Time Sync
and can be located up to 1200 meters
away from any Remote Unit. Data Concentrator

Serial Modbus
Time Stamped Data

Network
RiSCue Alarm Connections
Management to other
Software applications
using OPC

2.56
DMS-2000 Remote Unit Single Chassis Block Diagram
Chassis Dimensions &
Connections
The chassis are standard depth single
or double 19" wide card racks. The MOTHER BOARD
boxes contain the CPU, the I/O, the
relay cards and the power supply. The
size of the chassis is dependent on the
system size, the number of alarms to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
be monitored, the number of control R
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E
switches and the number of lamp C
OR G
outputs etc. The chassis motherboards P U
have predetermined positions for the U RELAY MODULES
L
CPU and regulator, while the I/O and AS REQUIRED A
relay cards can be located in any other T
O
slot. The chassis can be ordered front R
or rear mounted — the angle brackets
are simply reversed from back to front
as necessary.

Double Chassis Block Diagram

MOTHER BOARD
E
X
T
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 N
R D
INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES E E
C R
P OR G
RELAY MODULES U
U L B
AS REQUIRED A U
T S
O
R

MOTHER BOARD

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES


OR
RELAY MODULES
AS REQUIRED

2.57
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
Dimensions
Single Chassis
7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL
7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"
(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283"
(185.0mm) 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
.098" (8.7mm)
(2.5mm)

5.126"
(132.5mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)

1.483"
(37.68mm)

.71"
(18.0mm)

Double Chassis
7.025"
(178.4mm)
MIN. CLEARANCE FOR
MODULE WITHDRAWAL

7.40" SEE NOTE 19.00"


(188.0mm) (482.6mm)
7.283" 18.312"
(465.13mm) .344"
(185.0mm) (8.7mm)
.098"
(2.5mm)

2.250"
(57.15mm)

7.500"
(190.5mm)

10.468"
(265.9mm)
2.250"
(57.17mm)

1.483"
(37.68mm)

.71"
(18.0mm)

2.58
DMS-2000 Remote Units Annunciator Displays Data Concentrator
The Remote Unit is a The DMS-2000 Remote Units The Data Concentrator is the central
microprocessor based input/ provide lamp driver outputs for collection unit for up to 16 Remote
output device that collects both connection into any variety of Units. Multiple Data Concentrators
analog and digital inputs. It time Lamp Displays. Ametek’s AN-6160 can be used for un-limited size
and date stamps the alarms, and AN-5131 are compact systems. The Data Concentrator
activates lamps, relays or audible displays that take less than 5 also provides connections for
devices and accepts control inches of depth behind the panel. external clock synchronization and
inputs from your The AN-6150 is a modular display sends the same time reference to all
pushbuttons.(test, acknowledge, that can be configured into any remote units, so the entire system
reset, etc.) Each Remote Unit size from 4 cells high by 4 cells maintains a 1msec time stamp
supports up to 128 inputs and wide. Each ‘window cell’ can regardless of how many inputs there
outputs, all time tagged to the display 1, 2, 4 or 8 separate alarms are. The Data Concentrator comes
millisecond. The Remote Unit depending on your size availability. with a standard Serial Output for
communicates to the Data Window legends are laser printed connection into the RiSCue Alarm
Concentrator using a high speed on standard transparencies by the Management Software. The DMS-
RS-422 serial communication link, user, providing a quick and 2000 also comes with our OPC
that can be as long as 1200 economical solution especially for Server, (version 1 & 2 compliant), for
meters. (longer distances available changes or additions. The AN- connection into any OPC Client
through fiber optics) 5131 is a modular display that can Application.
be configured into any size from 15
cells high by 15 cells wide. Each RiSCue Alarm
‘window cell’ can display 1, 2, 3 or Management Software
4 separate alarms depending on
your size availability. All lamps are The RiSCue Alarm Management
front accessible, and a variety of Software provides the alarm display,
window colors are available to intelligent reports and instant
highlight your most critical alarms. notification of alarms using phone,
fax, pager, email, marquee or PA
System.

DMS-2000 System Features DMS-2000 System Benefits


Annunciation and Events Recording combined Reduces wiring costs, and system maintenance
Up to 2048 Inputs per each Data Concentrator Large system capacity, meets most requirements

Serial Communications, Modbus & OPC Share alarm information with many applications,
at minimal cost

1 Millisecond Resolution Needed for accurate process fault diagnosis


System fault diagnostics Always know the status of your system
First-out indication of alarms Aids in failure diagnosis, identify what the initial cause is

Analog and Digital Inputs Accepts full complement of alarm input types
Modular system architecture Low cost expansion, easily changed
and adapted to the application
Windows Configuration utility Easy to setup, configure and make changes
Environmental noise immunity Operates in all environments

2.59
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
DMS-2000 Specifications Mechanical Characteristics
Single Chassis: 5.5"H x 7.25"D x 19"W
Electrical Characteristics Power Requirements: Double Chassis: 11.5"H x 7.25"D x 19"W
24 VDC, 48 VDC, 125 VDC ± 12%
120/240 VAC ± 10% 50/60 Hz Chassis Mounting: surface or rack mount capability

Alarm Input Current: Terminals:


approximately 2 mA per input all input/output modules have gold plated
terminals.
Contact Inputs:
NO or NC, field selectable by DIP switch Input Time Delay:
on a per point basis 0.04 sec to 40 min
in 40 millisecond increments
Field Contact Voltage:
24, 48, 125 VDC, isolated and non-isolated, Flash Rates: on/off time adjustable.
120 VAC isolated
Push-button Controls:
Analog Inputs: 4-20 mA and 1-5 VDC Acknowledge
First Out Acknowledge
Capacity: Lamp Test
128 digital inputs per RU or Group Lamp Test
32 analog inputs per RU or combinations of both. Full Functional Test
2048 inputs per data concentrator. Reset
Audible Silence
Analog Input Response Time: 40 millisecond.
Output Assignment:
Digital Input Response Time: 20 millisecond. All inputs can be programmed to any output:
lamp, reed relay or power relay, or multiples of
Resolution: 1 millisecond. the same by use of the configurator program.

Outputs Audibles:
Lamp Drive: 200 mA @24 VDC, 5 watts 16 Alarm Audible Groups
Reed Relay: 100 VDC @ 0.25 A max., SPST, 1 Alarm Return to Normal Group
volts free NO/NC
Power Relay: 24 VDC @ 2.0 A, 240 VAC @ 1.0 A Groups:
16 Control Groups
Capacity: up to 224 digital outputs per RU 16 Audible Groups
16 Group Lamps
Data Transmission 16 Group Relays
Data Concentrator To Computer – 16 Group Inhibits
Remote To Data Concentrator – up to 9600 baud 16 First Out Groups
Type Distance
RS-232C 50ft/15m Individual Point Inhibit:
RS-422 4000ft/1200m Software inhibit available for any alarm point.

Alarm Sequence — Annunciator Functions Environmental


All ISA Sequences. Two sequences per CPU Operating Temperature: 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
available. Either ISA sequence can be
assigned to any input point. Storage Temperature: -13° to 185°F (-25 to 85°C)

Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing

2.60
RiSCue
Innovative Alarm
Management MARQUEE
Through Intelligent
Messaging FAX
PA SYSTEM

EMAIL
Effectively Monitor Your Entire Plant or
Process with the Dynamic Functions of VIDEO PHONE
RiSCue. This versatile open solution
provides seamless integration into any
control or information environment!

RiSCue™ is an innovative PC-based


alarm management system with an 2 WAY PAGER
unprecedented capability to accurately
detect, present, notify and respond to WEB
abnormal conditions. RiSCue™’s open
technology provides direct connectivity
to plant floor data, using non-propri-
etary protocols like DDE and OPC. The
advanced alarm detection methods
provide 16 limit tests on each input, RiSCue™ serves as the front-end for all of alarm information, even internet
adding unparalleled preciseness. Auto- of Ametek’s alarm monitoring products, compatible through a web browser.
configuration of alarm inputs eliminates providing a turn-key solution for all your
difficult startups by importing the tag monitoring needs. RiSCue™’s OPC
information instantaneously. Server also provides direct connectivity RiSCue™ Providing the
to OPC compliant devices, and DDE
Your plant response time is improved information exchange opens up many
New Standard In
with the instant notification of alarms by other possibilities to centralize your alarm Messaging
phone, pager, two-way radio, fax, management. Whether you’re measuring
email and local announce, reaching you temperature, pressure, flow, or discrete Activate every emergency response
anywhere at anytime. Powerful, yet contacts, putting RiSCue™ in charge of from one system!
secure; RiSCue™’s fully distributed all of your alarms will save you time and
client-server architecture provides key money. RiSCue™ Alarm Management
personnel with on-line information of Plant Alarm Notification
will reduce the labor required to process
plant conditions. Productivity is alarms, provide greater consistency in
enhanced while maintaining safety and • Announce alarm through
the methods used to handle alarms and
regulatory compliance. existing plant communication
provide a quick response to the problem
systems
at hand.
Accurate and efficient alarm manage- • Distribute information
ment with distributed notification everywhere it is needed
become a reality with the advanced • Alert operators at connected
features of RiSCue™. Using RisCue™
Powerful and Secure computers
for total plant solutions will improve • Live video feed of process
consistency in the methods used to • 32 Bit Native NT, conditions
process alarms, and open gateways for multi-threaded design
information sharing. • Intelligent distribution of Any plant alarm can initiate the
information to anyone, notification system. You could notify a
anywhere supervisor of an event by cell phone
during evening hours, then print a
Open Connectivity RiSCue™ takes advantage of report on his fax machine or send an
Windows NT™’s enhanced perfor- email for review the following morn-
• Provides Alarm Management mance, security, and server-client ing. Plant personnel could be reached
Systems with direct access to architecture. Multiple clients can be by pager, detailing the exact nature
plant floor data allowed partial or full access to the and location of the problem. You
• Replaces labor-intensive alarm information and configuration receive the information instanta-
interfaces currently used to features. LAN, WAN compatibility neously and you are guaranteed your
exchange data provides local or remote distribution best people will always be notified of
and respond to critical alarms,
regardless of date and time.
2.61
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording

These agents can be activated alone


or in any combination.

PHONE: RisCue™ will dial, connect


and transmit a voice message of the
alarm, time and date of occurrence,
process values and any custom Configure all actions,
message. Remote acknowledgement including video, by simply
ensures the call was received correctly. selecting the action and
RiSCue™’s text-to-speech technology recipient from the pull-down
options.
provides the quickest set-up, eliminat-
ing the need to record custom voice
messages. Sound the Alarm for RiSCue™ uses a highly accurate,
sophisticated means of setting alarm
PAGER: Worldwide numeric and Advanced Monitoring set-points and limits through boolean
alphanumeric pages are supported. equations, rate of change and deviation
Numeric will display a phone number, Dramatically increase productivity and tests. RiSCue™ provides the capability
while alphanumeric can display the regulatory compliance! to perform 16 separate limit tests for
same text message sent by voice, fax each analog input, allowing the closest
or e-mail. examination of your most critical
Ease of Use alarms. RiSCue™ can also use
E-MAIL: RisCue™ can send and preselected alarm set-points from
receive e-mail messages. Alarm • Easy to configure, you can be existing applications, bringing in the
information is integrated into the up and running in less than information automatically. Real time
message headers to allow recipient to an hour alarm information can be transferred
see information quickly. When • Simple day to day operations, from the external application
RiSCue™ receives an e-mail, it will with a natural and intuitive
initiate any desired sequence of software configuration (Annunciator, Sequence of Events
additional actions. • Locates data sources Recorder, etc.,) or can be time and date
automatically and imports the stamped directly at the RiSCue™ PC.
VIDEO: RisCue™ supports both fixed tag information seamlessly
and remote control cameras. At any
time, the cameras can pan and zoom For an alarm management system to Intelligent Notification
to any preset area, providing the detail be truly effective, it has to be easy to
you need. The live video feed can be configure and easy to use for day-to-
Options
stored and replayed whenever needed. day operations and RiSCue™ is just
• Selectable alarm and action
that. RiSCue™ offers an Auto-Configu-
FAX: RiSCue™ will send a fax and delays
ration feature which locates data
confirm receipt. Fax banner, to and • Delay on acknowledge
sources automatically and imports the
from fields and message are automati- • Built-in notification schedule
tag information almost instantaneously.
cally created. Special programming of drivers, adding
Alarm and instant notifications can be
large databases, and bringing in alarms
2-WAY RADIO/ PLANT PAGING & delayed to give plant personnel time to
from a variety of equipment is done
ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEMS: react, or to prevent nuisance alarms.
effortlessly by searching the network
Analog audio signal is generated Delays on acknowledgement provide
for data sources like Annunciators,
through a sound card for 2-way radio, plant personnel a reasonable time to
Events Recorders, DCS & PLC
paging and announcement systems. act on the alarm before activating the
Systems, or HMI Systems.
Audio consists of an introductory tone notification system. RiSCue™’s
followed by any text-to-speech Contact Editor stores phone numbers,
message. pager numbers, email addresses, etc.
Advanced Alarm and the Schedule Editor indicates
MARQUEE: Standard ASCII messag- Detection when these numbers can be reached.
ing output is provided for overhead Contacting anyone at any location at
marquees. Flashing and scrolling are • 16 limit tests per process input anytime is possible.
supported. • Boolean, rate of change,
and deviation alarm tests
• Reads raw analog or digital
values
• Time and date stamp added
to all alarms

2.62
Intelligent Alarm &
Action Display
• Alarm and Action Summary, Alarm
and Action History
• Built-in Active X controls for
Annunciator Graphics
• Configurable Alarm Zones and
Priorities
• Advanced sorting and querying
• Auto-Archival of alarms

RiSCue™ displays alarm and actions


using separate windows for current
events and historical storage. Auto-
matic archiving of alarms for permanent
storage unclutters your history Reports
for easy viewing.

RiSCue™’s built-in Active X controls


provide Annunciator Graphic Displays
with selectable grid sizes to mimic
alarm panels. Window colors and alarm
set-up is easily configurable. To further
simplify your alarm viewing, all alarms
can be configured with their own alarm
zone and priority. RiSCue™ user
access can be limited to specific Alarm
Zones, enhancing security and
usability. Unlimited Flexibility
RiSCue™’s open connectivity to OPC (version 2.0 compliant,) DDE and ODBC information
exchange opens up many other possibilities to centralize your alarm management.

Distributing Plant Alarm


Information
• Alarm information at your
fingertips
• Share information across
your company’s existing
open network

RiSCue™’s alarm and event informa-


tion can be made available to multiple
users and plant management through a
company’s existing open network.
RiSCue™ requires only a network card
and cable for connection to your open
network.

2.63
AMETEK
Alarm and Event Recording
RiSCue™ Features RiSCue™ System Requirements
Open Connectivity and Data Sharing Server:
• Direct connectivity to Ametek’s Windows NT™ 4.0 or later version
Alarm Annunciator and Sequence 66 MHz 486 processor (100 MHz Pentium™ recommended)
of Events Recorder products 16 MB RAM (32 recommended)
• OPC compliant, DDE, InTouch, 30 MB free disk space
and FIX data connectivity VGA monitor, mouse, CD ROM drive
• Fully functional OPC Server
(version 2.0)
Clients:
Instant Alarm Notification (can also run on same processor as Server)
• Phone, fax, pager, two-way radio, Windows 95™/Windows NT™ 4.0 or later version
email, local PA announce, display 66 MHz 486 processor
marquee 16 MB RAM
• Live real-time video feed 10 MB free disk space
and remote control capability VGA monitor, mouse, CD ROM drive
• Simultaneous and back-up
notifications
• Text-to-speech engine for natural Instant Notification System (Action Agents)
voice annunciation
Action Agent Hardware Requirement
Fully Distributed Design
• 32 bit native NT, multi-threaded Local announce through PC speaker PC Sound Card
design or plant paging system, two-way radio
• Fully distributed server-client
architecture Phone and numeric paging NT modem with Unimodem V driver
• Alarm information shared with supports, or Dialogic telephone board
anyone, anywhere, using existing
LAN/WAN Alphanumeric paging Standard modem
• Advanced security restricts
unauthorized access Fax Standard modem with fax capability
(a single modem will support
Advanced Alarm and Event numeric paging and alphanumeric
Processing paging and fax
• Comprehensive alarm
configuration, up to 16 limit tests Email Connection to POP server using
per input SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
• Boolean, rate of change and
deviation test Display marquee Serial Com Port
• Reads raw analog or digital values
• Time and date stamp added to Video NT compatible video capture board
all alarms and B/W camera having standard
1V peak-peak output. A CD
Ease of Use recorder, or other tape drive is
• Auto-configuration allows direct recommended for long term video
import of alarm tags storage.
• Configurable alarm zones and
priorities
• Advanced sorting and querying
• Auto-archival of alarms
• Import/export alarm database

Intelligent Display
• Alarm and action summary, alarm
and action history
• Built-in Active X controls for
annunciator graphics

2.64
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Machine monitoring used on the front end of our monitoring
equipment is essential systems.
in today’s industrial
The following sections detail the
market place. It offers different types of Machine Monitoring
customers added safety equipment and related products. Each
for their machines, section includes complete specifica-
tions and ordering. Dimensional
plants, and personnel. drawings are included for all products
When used properly, and accessories.
machine monitoring
can be the first warning
of an impending
“un-safe” condition,
**Obsolete**
so breakdowns can be
averted. The system can
also be used to monitor
a machine’s condition,
so preventative
maintenance can be
scheduled.
• Monitor Process and Key
Machine Parameters
➤ Temperature
➤ Thrust
➤ Seismic
➤ Displacement
➤ Tachometer
➤ Eccentricity

• Continuous Monitoring

• Dual and Triple Channels

• Complete Accessories

• FM/CSA Approval for Div 2 areas


Ametek offers a complete line of Machine
Monitoring equipment, from single
channel Vibration switches to multi-
channel Systems. The VT-3360 Vibration
Transmitter are recommended for single
channel vibration monitoring of non-
critical applications.The VT-2490
Machine Monitoring System is recom-
mended for critical applications that
require multiple channels of temperature,
process, and vibration variables. The TM-
2480 Temperature Monitoring System is
recommended for all applications that
require multiple channels of temperature
and process variables only. The monitor-
ing systems are configurable to the
application using plug-in modules for
Temperature, Thrust, Seismic, Displace-
ment, Tachometer, and Eccentricity
measurements. Ametek also offers a
complete line of probes and sensors

3.1
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Two Wire Vibration
Transmitter VT-3360 VT-3360 Specifications Isolation: 1000V rms to housing.
Operating Temperature Range:
-22° to +185°F (-30° to +85°C) Wire Size: AWG #12 maximum.
Mounting: 1/2-14 NPT stud, any axis
Enclosure: NEMA 4, weatherproof (sensitive axis parallel to stud center line).

Agency Approvals: FM & CSA Case Material: Cast aluminum, low


(Explosion proof): copper content.
FM Class I: Div. 1 (Groups C & D)
FM Class II: Div. 1 (Groups E, F,, G) Overrange Capability:
FM Class III: Div. 1 150% of range, I max = 1.5 IFS (DC only)
Div. 2 Class I (Groups A, B, C, D) 140% of range, I max = 1.4 IFS (DC and
I.S. Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D AC signals combined)
with Barriers Where IFS is full scale output current.
Weight: 3 lbs. (1.4 Kg.) Note: That to maintain linearity under
The Ametek Model VT-3360 Vibration overrange conditions RL must be less
Transmitter is a totally solid-state RFI/EMI Immunity: Tested to SAMA than or equal to:
device providing vibration monitoring Standard PM33.1C.1978. Class (Vs-12) Volts
for non-critical rotating machinery. It 2-ABC-3% Max, lid on and metal 0.03 Amps
combines a vibration sensor and conduit shielding wires, 20MHz to 1GHz
electronics that provide for input @ 10V/Meter
power, 4-20 mA analog vibration VT-3360 Ordering
output signal, and 0-1.0 mA vibration Repeatability: +2% of reading Model Description
wave form output signal-all on just two VT-3360-05 0-0.5 ips/4-20 mA (05)
wires. Various adjustments, sensing Outputs: (0-12.5mm/sec)
ranges and other features make the a. 4-20 mA DC proportional to (4-750Hz, 240-45000RPM)
VT-3360 suitable for many vibration vibration level.
monitoring applications. b. User-selectable instantaneous Model Description
vibration wave form signal from VT-3360-10 0-1.0 ips/4-20 mA (10)
Power for the VT-3360 is from a user 0-1.0 mA peak A.C. (0-25mm/sec)
supplied unregulated DC power-supply (4-750Hz, 240-45000RPM)
with a maximum voltage of 50 volts. Power (V/S): 12 to 50 VDC,
The proper voltage of the power-supply unregulated Vs = RL x IFS + 12: Model Description
is calculated from the equation. RL = ohms; IFS = amps VT-3360-20 0-2.0 ips/4-20 mA (20)
(0-50mm/sec)
Transverse Sensitivity: Less than (4-400Hz, 240-24000RPM)
10% of sensitive axis.

VT-3360 Outline
& Dimensions
5.66"
(143.76mm)
3.56"
(88.90mm)

1.32" 3.69"
(33.53mm) (93.73mm)

3/4-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT


.69"
(17.53mm)

3.2
TM-2480 Temperature/ Each model in the series has five
Process Monitors different outputs associated with its Three High-Density Models
Ametek Series TM-2480 monitoring capability. Each tempera- The Series TM-2480 is available in
Temperature Monitors are complete ture variable, with its associated alarm three different models/capacities,
integral systems designed for the and shutdown trip levels, can be using dual or triple input modules.
continuous monitoring of selected and digitally displayed. Point The TM-2481 model includes a meter/
temperature points whose primary status indication is provided by light common service module and the
sensors are resistance temperature emitting diodes (LED) mounted on the capability for up to two modules. The
detectors (RTD) and/or front panel of each module. Integral TM-2482 includes a meter/common
thermocouples, and they provide facilities for reflashing group alarms into service module and capability for up to
both alarm and shutdown functions the control room annunciator are 4 modules. The TM-2485 is available to
when preset levels are exceeded. furnished. Finally, an analog output monitor up to 10 modules of either the
Three standard models are signal is available on each point for dual or triple input variety, providing up
available, all of which utilize high- driving external indicators and/or to 30 channels per system. This unit
density, two or three channel, plug- recorders. has an expandable capacity beyond
in modules. the 10 modules through the use of one
All TM-2480 models include one or more chassis of an additional 10
common trip and one common alarm modules each, including auxiliary
relay in a meter/common service power supply. The only limitation to
module. Should any of the individual system size is the visual readout
alarm or trip set points be exceeded, distance between detector modules
one or both of these common relays on the furthest slave chassis and the
will operate. Additionally, individual per- common digital display on the master
point relays can be provided. chassis.

On triple input modules, the per-point All three TM-2480 modules are
relay can be jumper selected to supplied with integral detector mod-
operate either the alarm or trip set ules, meter/common service module,
point. As an alternative, these per-point operator display panel, power supply,
relays on triple input modules can be and field wiring termination. All mod-
linked to provide a group alarm and ules, in turn, are standardized, front
group trip per module. Sectionalized removable, plug-in type with two or
grouping of three-point modules within three-channel circuits. Field wiring
one system is, therefore, easily connections are made via high-density,
accommodated by wiring module clamp-style terminals. System power is
group alarm or trip relay contracts in 115 or 230 volts AC, 50/60 Hz, as
parallel or series. This dramatically standard. DC powered systems for 24,
reduces customer relay logic wiring 48, and 125 volts fully isolated supplies
and installation costs. are available as an option on all
systems.
On dual input modules, two relays
per input are provided – one for the
alarm set point and one for the trip
set point. Output relays are environ-
mentally sealed (nitrogen filled) to
ensure reliable operation in dusty or
corrosive environments.

3.3
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring

and set points. Selection of these Burden:


Available Models a. TM-2481-less than 23 VA,
Series TM-2480 Temperature Monitors readouts is made by means of solid-
state, interlocked, push-button circuits fully equipped
are available in the following standard b. TM-2482-less than 32 VA,
configurations: with LEDs, to acknowledge parameter
selection. fully equipped
c. TM-2485-less than 60 VA, per
a. TM-2481– two module system 10 module chassis
comprised of two dual or triple input Push-button and circuits for selecting
detector modules, plus meter/ in-service meter calibration checks are Power Interruption: up to 150 rms
common service module. Suitable also located here. without spurious alarms/trips
for panel mounting. RFI Immunity: Test classification-
Additionally, a common group reflash
SAMA Standard: PMC 33.1C.1978,
b. TM-2482 – four module system indicator and reset push-button are
located on the meter/common service Class 2—ABC—2.5% max with sensor
comprised of four dual or triple input leads shielded and twisted core input
detector modules, plus meter/ module. This push-button will be
wiring utilized: max error of 1.0% at
common service module. Suitable illuminated if one or more points within
the system are in an alarm or trip 27 MHz, 150 MHz, and 470 MHz at a
for panel mounting. field strength of 10 volts per meter
condition. Pressing this push-button
c. TM-2485 – a 10 module system will clear alarm and trip circuits on all Customer Terminals: clamp-style
comprised of ten dual or triple input channels that are jumpered for manual terminals with wire protection on 0.2"
detector modules, plus meter/ reset, providing the channel input (5 mm) centers; maximum conductor
common service module. Suitable conditions have returned to normal. size 10 AWG (2.5 mm2)
for 19-inch rack mounting; optional Details of the indicator annunciator Dimensions and Weights
bezel for panel mounting available. sequence are defined in “General a. TM-2481: 12.5 lbs (5.8 kg)
Specifications.” b. TM-2482: 14.5 lbs (6.6 kg)
For systems greater than 10 modules, c. TM-2485: 30.0 lbs (13.6 kg)
additional 10 module chassis can be The meter/common service module
provided complete with 10 dual or triple includes a common alarm relay and a Approvals
input detector modules and integral common trip (shutdown) relay. Alarm CSA and FM approved for Division 2
auxiliary power supply. Connections outputs from each individual temperature locations
between 10 module chassis are made by channel are bused to the common alarm
a plug-in cable slave harness. Standard reflash relay. (As an option, the reflash relay
length is 39 inches (1 meter). can be jumpered to serve as an audible TM-2480 Ordering
warning relay without reflash.) Similarly, all To order a TM-2480 System
Special Enclosure Options trip outputs from each channel are bused to –Specify the chasis/CSM model
Series TM-2480 Temperature Monitors the common trip relay. number, as shown below
are available with the following special –Specify the detector module model
enclosure options: TM-2480 Specifications number(s), as shown on pages
Operating Temperature Range: 4.12 and 4.13.
a. Weatherproof enclosures for surface -4° to 140°F (-20°C to +60°C) maxi- TM-2480 Chassis/CSM Ordering
mounting with protection to NEMA 4 mum operating temperature [storage -
or IP55 requirements. 22° to 167°F (-30°C to +75°C)] TM248 1– 2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9
Ambient Temperature Effects: Item 1 System Size
b. Weatherproof with viewing window a. Span-less than 0.02%/°C Code Description
for panel mounting. b. Zero-less than 0.05%/°C 1 2 Input modules
2 4 Input modules
c. Terminals are available at the rear Relative Humidity: 10% to 60% for 5 10 Input modules
of the chassis for customer wiring to basic accuracy; 10% to 90% with
remote read push-buttons when reduced accuracy of ± 0.4% for set Item 2 Range Number 1 Linear RTD
the TM-2480 is mounted in a points and readout. Code Description
sealed enclosure. Environmental Protection: optional P 100Ω Pt RTD
conformal circuit board coating; all C 10Ω Cu RTD
relays are sealed, nitrogen filled, and V DC Voltage*
TM-2480 Common have gold plated contacts I DC Current*
Service Module System Power: O Not fitted
a. Standard 117/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, *Consult Factory for ranging in engi-
+10% to -20% limits neering units. Insert value per instruc-
Each TM-2480 system is equipped
b. Optional 24, 48, or 125 VDC, tions in next section (SCALING).
with one meter/common service
module (CSM) which supplies power to isolated, +20% to -20% limits
the detector modules and provides (Continued on page 3.5)
Power Supply Effects: less than
digital readout of channel temperatures ±0.1% of span for a ±10% variation
from nominal voltage
3.4
TM-2480 Dimensions Item 3 Range Number 1 Scaling
Insert range code 01 to 29. See Input
module specifications on page 4.13.
TM-2481 For analog inputs, insert desired
Panel Mounting readout.
9.4" Example: I23 (0-600 PSI)
(238mm) 4-20 mA=0-600 PSI
10.6" 0-100% Readout
(268mm)
Item 4 Range Number 2 T/C or Ni RTD
Code Description
N 120Ω Ni RTD
K Type K T/C
BEZEL
14.0" DEEP T Type T T/C
(356mm) 7.0"
(177mm) J Type J T/C
8.2"
E Type E T/C
(208mm) O Not Included
Item 5 Range Number 2 Scaling
Insert range code 01 to 29, See Input
module specifications on page 4.13.
TM-2482
Panel Mounting Item 6 System Power
Code Description
P1 220 V/240 VAC
9.4"
(238mm) P2 110 V/120 VAC
10.6"
P4 24 VDC Isolated
(268mm) P5 48 VDC Isolated
P6 125 VDC Isolated
Item 7 System Common Relays
Common trip relay provided as standard.
BEZEL Code Description
14.0" DEEP
(356mm)
9.4"
(238mm)
A Audible warning relay
R Reflash relay
10.6"
(268mm) Item 8 Relay Status
Code Description
E Energized for normal
(Both relays)
D De-energized for normal
TM-2485 Rack Mounting (Both relays)
A Alarm energized/trip
de-energized
R Alarm de-energized trip
8.75"
energized
(223mm)
Item 9 Special Options
Code Description
BO Panel-Mounting Bezel,
TM-2485
19.0" Panel Mounting SS Sealed surface-mounting
14.0" DEEP
(483mm) Enclosure
(356mm) HW Hinged panel mount window
EX Expanded System Above
10 Input Modules
9.4" CC Conformal Coating
(283mm)
00 No Special Options
D2 Div 2, CSA, FM Cert.
19R 19" Rackmount adapter
2481/82 only

14.0" DEEP 17.8"


(356mm) (452mm)

BEZEL OPTION PANEL CUTOUT

3.5
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring

VT-2490 Machine In component terms, a complete or other emergency action: GROUP


Monitoring System VT-2490 system consists of a base unit ALARM, GROUP TRIP, and Probe OK
chassis with rear panel I/O terminals, relays. The VT-2495 offers even more—
detector modules, and a common the capability to distinguish between
• Vibration, Temperature, and control/display/power supply module. vibration and temperature/process
Process Monitoring in a Single The VT-2490 system will accept most problems in a large system. Thus, critical
Integrated System standard field sensors such as proxim- temperature and/or process ALARMS
ity probes, accelerometers, velocity (and similarly TRIPS) can be given special
• High-Density, Plug-In Chassis in pickups, thermocouples, RTDs and attention. The VT-2495 has up to five
Three Standard Capacities process transmitters. separate relays: GROUP ALARM and
GROUP TRIP relays for selected
• Easy-To-Read Display in
Three different size systems are available, temperature and process alarms;
Engineering Units
all of which have a common service GROUP ALARM and GROUP TRIP
• Local and Remote Display of module and which accept any combina- relays for vibration channels; and Probe
Key Data tion of plug-in detector modules. OK to warn of any vibration sensor faults.
Each channel can be individually
• Unique Common System Relays The VT-2491 system, designed for interfaced with these system relays using
panel mounting, provides for up to field-selectable jumper links. On all three
• Field Selectable Operation of two detector modules. The VT-2492 systems, the GROUP ALARM(s) also
Key Features system, also designed for panel serve as GROUP REFLASH(es) to flash
mounting, includes up to four monitor- both the lighted reset push-button and a
• RFI Immunity ing modules. The VT-2495 system remote annunciator. The reset button
accepts up to 10 detector modules permits reset of all relay circuits that are
• A Choice of AC and DC
and is designed for 19-inch rack jumpered for manual reset, provided
Power Supplies
mounting, with an optional bezel for conditions have returned to normal. It
• Easy System Expansion panel mounting. This unit is expandable also permits acknowledgment of
in the Field beyond 10 modules through one or abnormal circuits. It can be activated
more slave chassis of 10 modules remotely, and serves as a unique built-in
• FM/CSA Approval for Division 2 each. For intermediate size systems, annunciator. It lights and flashes (and the
Locations blank cover panels are available. relay changes state) whenever one
channel (or other subsequent selected
Ametek VT-2490 high-density ones) goes to ALARM or TRIP. REFLASH
VT-2490 machine monitors provide
systems monitor all key machine permits the grouping of many channels
unique system relay capability for
parameters: vibration, position, into one remote annunciator point
maximum safety and flexibility. The
temperature, speed and process without loss of pre-channel warning and
VT-2491 and VT-2492 have up to three
variables such as flows, pressure acknowledgment capability.
separate, sealed relays for annunciation
and levels.

3.6
All models feature a choice of AC VT-2490 Specifications Customer Terminals: Clamp style
(standard) or DC (optional) power. Operating Temperature Range: terminals with wire protection on 0.2"
Field wiring connections are made on -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F) (5 mm) centers; maximum conductor
the chassis exterior system backplane size 10 AWG (2.5 mm2).
via high-density DIN clamp-style Storage Temperature Range:
terminals. -30°C to +75°C (-22°F to +167°F) Mounting:
a. VT-2491 & VT-2492 : panel
A number of valuable system options System Power: mounting with integral bezel.
are available, including RFI/EMI a. Standard 117/240 VAC 50/60 Hz, b. VT-2495: standard 19-inch rack
immunity, conformal coating of all 10% to -20% variation mounting; optional panel mounting
circuit boards, an extender module for b. Optional 24/48, 125 ±20% VDC with bezel.
calibration/troubleshooting, various isolated
weatherproof and waterproof enclo- Weights (dependent on system):
sures for surface (wall) mounting, and Power Supply Effects: a. VT-2491: 13 lbs (6 kg)
flush panel mounting and hinged < ±0.1% of span (FS) for 10% variation fully equipped.
window assemblies for waterproofing b. VT-2492: 15 lbs (7 kg)
on the face of the monitor in a panel. Burden: fully equipped.
All enclosures contain viewing windows a. VT-2491: less than 28 VA fully c. VT-2495: 31 lbs (14 kg)
eliminating the constant need to open equipped fully equipped.
the enclosure. A remote selection b. VT-2492: less than 38 VA fully
option is also offered to allow any equipped For additional data, see Ordering
system to be mounted in a purged or c. VT-2495 : less than 70 VA fully Section.
weatherproof enclosure and viewed equipped
through a window. Readout selection is
achieved by using customer supplied RFI/EMI Immunity:
remote push-buttons wired to terminals a. Temperature process modules:
at the rear of the chassis. SAMA Standard PMC33.1C.1978,
Class 2 — ABC — 2.5% maximum
For hookup of portable vibration with sensor leads shielded and
analysis equipment, one output jack twisted covers; maximum error 1.0%
for shaft phase reference is provided at 27 MHz, 150 MHz and 470 MHz
on the front of the VT-2490-CSM at field strength 10 V/Meter.
module. Two timing mark output jacks Standard on all models.
for different shaft speeds are provided b. Vibration modules: dependent on
on the VT-2495-CSM module. type of sensor and sensitivity (consult
factory). Typical maximum 5%.

3.7
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2490 Common VT-2490 Common
Service Module Service Module
The Common Service Module (CSM) Specifications
supplies power to the detector modules System Input Range and Parameter
and sensors for increased reliability. The ∂ Combinations:
CSM’s digital display provides precise VT-2490-CSM (VT-2491, 92 systems):
readout on-demand of all channels in 3 standard; 6 optional.
easy-to-understand, customer-selected VT-2495-CSM (VT-2495 system):
engineering units, such as mils, in/sec, π ∏ 6 standard.
°F, °C, %, psig, mm/sec and others. All ∫
Notes:
channel parameters are individually ➏ 1. One non-linear input (T/C or 120 Ohm
selectable: input, ALARM and TRIP set Ni RTD) per system is standard.
points, GAP/BIAS, zero point and full ➐ Several ranges (up to system
scale deflection (span). Proximity probe maximum) can be specified for one
gap clearance and seismic transducer type of sensor.
bias are accurately displayed in volts on 2. Minimum span for T/C inputs: 8 mV;
the common service module for calibra- ∑ minimum span for RTD inputs: 25mV
tion purposes, as well as for in-service
checks. Digital Meter Readout:
Maximum Scale : 1000 to +1999 with
Due to the precise nature of the digital full floating decimal point and resolution
readout, the critical accuracy of the of ±1 digit to display the following in
ALARM and TRIP set points is ±0.1% FS Common Service Module Features engineering units:
or 1 digit. The machine’s monitored 1. Digital LED Display: provides a. Channel input
condition is also displayed on the common readout of all channel parameters b. Channel ALARM set point
service module with high resolution. and set points in customer selected c. Channel TRIP set point
Display selection is made by lighted, engineering units, with fully floating d. Gap Bias Voltage: for vibration inputs
interlocked, common push-buttons and decimal point. e. Meter range calibration check: zero
per-channel, momentary-contact push- 2. Digital Display Readouts: common and FSD
button on each detector module. service modules provide display of Engineering Units Display:
Optional outputs can duplicate the call- customer-selected engineering units. a. 3 standard or 5 optional parameters
up and display of all selectable functions 3. Common System Push-button: (in addition to “gap” volts) for
on a remote separate meter or CRT. lighted, interlocked buttons, each VT-2491 and VT-2492 systems.
with an adjacent LED, allow operator b. 6 standard parameters (one of which
Ametek offers two different common selection for display of: input is volts) for VT-2495 system.
service modules. The VT-2490-CSM is (machine’s monitored condition);
Relay Contact Outputs:
used in both the VT-2491 and the VT- ALARM set point; TRIP set point; gap
Common service module relays environ-
2492 systems and accepts up to three (for sensor voltage gap or bias level);
mentally-sealed (nitrogen-filled) to avoid
different input range and parameter zero; and FSD (full scale deflection).
contamination:
combinations, with an option of three 4. Zero and Span Potentiometer:
a. AC–240 VAC maximum, 3 A
more. The VT-2495-CSM, which is calibrate readout of individual input
maximum, or 300 VA maximum.
designed for the VT-2495 system, ranges.
b. DC–up to 30 VDC maximum at 3 A
accepts up to six input range and 5. Reset Push-button (with reflash
maximum or 90 watts maximum,
parameter combinations. indicator): for manual reset of
resistive load; 30 VDC to 220 VDC
ALARM and TRIP circuits once
maximum, 50 watts switching
The CSM incorporates front panel set channel conditions return to normal.
maximum (resistive load only).
points for fine-calibrating the readout of 6. Front Panel Test Jacks: for in-service
c. VT-2491-CSM and VT-2492-CSM:
the span and zero points for all ranges. check of internal calibration source
up to three system relays–GROUP
In-service verification of the five volt using digital volt meter.
ALARM (Reflash), GROUP TRIP,
reference calibration source is also 7. Timing Mark Output Jack: for
Probe OK (optional).
available on the front panel. Start-up hookup of portable vibration analysis
d. VT-2495-CSM:
inhibit and x2 or x3 start-up multiplication equipment; provides shaft phase
1. Standard: same as above.
of all selected ALARM and TRIP circuits reference output (two different
2. Optional: five system relays:
are offered to facilitate normal run-ups outputs available on VT-2495-CSM).
(a) Temperature/process:
and protect during abnormal ones.
GROUP ALARM (Reflash),
Individual channels may be included (or
GROUP TRIP.
not) by a field-selectable jumper link. This
(b) Vibration: GROUP ALARM
permits special system control. The relay
(Reflash), GROUP TRIP,
“over-ride” is made known by a front
Probe OK.
panel LED, so that monitoring protection
is not inadvertently by-passed. Calibration Accuracy: Digital readout
±0.25% FSD or 1 digit (if greater).

3.8
VT-2490 Dimensions VT-2490 Ordering
To order a VT-2490 system
VT-2491Panel Mount –Specify the chassis/CSM model
number, as shown below.
–Specify the detector module model
9.4" number(s) as shown on pages
(238mm) 4.12 through 4.24
10.6"
(268mm)
VT-2490 Chassis/CSM Ordering

VT-249 1–2–3–4–5–6

14.0" DEEP BEZEL Must use one option from each group.
(356mm) 7.0"
(177mm)
Item 1 Rack Size
8.2" Code Description
(208mm)
1 2 module rack
2 4 module rack
5 10 module rack
VT- 2492 Panel Mount
Item 2 System Power
Code Description
1 220/240 VAC
2 110/120 VAC
9.4" 4 24 VDC isolated
(238mm)
5 48 VDC isolated
10.6"
(268mm) 6 125 VDC isolated

Item 3 CSM Relays


Code Description
A Audible warning relay (group alarm)
14.0" DEEP BEZEL R Reflash relay
9.4"
(356mm) (238mm) Note: Group Trip is standard.
10.6" Item 4 Optional CSM Relays
(268mm)
Code Description
K Probe OK (VT-2491, VT-2492)
R Probe OK, group alarm and trip
VT-2495 Rack Mount (VT-2495)
X No extra relays
(VT-2491, VT-2492, VT-2495)

Item 5 CSM Relay Status


8.75" Code Description
(223mm)
E Normally energized
D Normally de-energized

Item 6 Options
19.0" Panel Mount Code Description
(483mm) BO VT-2495 panel mount bezel
14.0" DEEP
(356mm) SS Surface mount weather-proof
cabinet
HW Hinged window cover, water-
9.4"
(283mm) proof
EX 10 module expansion chassis,
aux. p.s. per 10 extra modules
D2 Division 2 approval, CSA, FM
CC Conformal coating, CSM and
motherboard
14.0" DEEP 17.8" 00 No options
(356mm) (452mm) 19R 19" Rackmount adapter,
2491/92 only
BEZEL OPTION PANEL CUTOUT

3.9
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring

Detector Modules for from the system chassis’ rear terminal, Each channel of a dual channel module
TM-2480 and VT-2490 including a per-channel, filtered analog has adjustable ALARM and TRIP set
signal for data processing or strip chart points, which activate LED indicators and
Systems recording. relays when pre-set limits are exceeded.
The thermocouple and analog modules
TM-2471/2/3 Triple Field Selectable Relay Modes have input circuits that are fully floating
Each channel on any of these modules with 500 VDC channel-to-channel
Channel Temperature features a DPDT sealed relay. By means isolation, to ensure high rejection of
& Process Modules of jumpers on the module, these relays common mode ripple and noise and to
(For use with can be assigned to an ALARM function allow sensors to be grounded. The RTD
TM-2480 per point, TRIP function per point, or module incorporates a constant-current,
and VT-2490 Typical group alarm and group trip per module. three-wire compensated bridge circuit
systems) TM/VT This latter feature allows flexible grouping connected to the remote three-wire RTD
Detector of module relay alarm and trip contact sensor. All modules have automatic built-
Module outputs with a minimum of external in sensor failure detection. This feature
wiring, thus reducing system installation will cause an alarm (but will inhibit
costs. Jumpers are also provided on all shutdown) for sensor failure (see
TM-2471/2/3 high-density, triple channel circuits to allow in-service change of trip
modules provide continuous monitoring Specifications, Note 4). Up to five
mode (high or low), sequence (manual or different outputs per module are available
of RTDs, thermocouples, and process automatic reset), and relay state (normally
variables. These modules provide both from the system chassis’ rear terminal,
energized or de-energized). In addition, including a per-channel, filtered current or
alarm and shutdown functions per each channel may be jumpered to the
channel when pre-set limits are ex- voltage analog signal for data processing
system’s group alarm/reflash and group or strip chart recording.
ceeded and digital readout on demand, trip relays.
via the display on the system’s Common Field Selectable Relay Modes
Service Module.
TM-2474/5/7 Dual Each of the two channels per module
feature an alarm relay with SPDT
One range and sensor type can be Channel Temperature contacts and a trip relay with DPDT
specified per module, with the maximum
number of ranges and sensors deter-
& Process Modules contacts. Jumpers are provided to allow
mined by the monitor system. The triple (For use with in-service per-channel change of trip
channel thermocouple module (TM- TM-2480 mode (high or low), sequence (manual or
2471) accepts types K, T, J, and E and VT-2490 automatic reset) and relay state (normally
grounded and ungrounded thermo- systems) energized or de-energized.)
couples. The triple channel process Standard Analog Input Ranges:
module (TM-2472) accepts process Input Input
analog signals proportional to a wide Code Range Impedance
range of variables (pressure, flow, level, 22 1 to 5 mA 200Ω
etc.) in any of seven standard instrument 23 4 to 20 mA 50Ω
TM-2474/5/7 high-density, dual channel
ranges (six current and two voltage 24 10 to 50 mA 20Ω
modules provide continuous and process
ranges). The triple channel RTD module 25 0 to 1 mA 1K
variables. These modules provide both 26 0 to 10 mA 100Ω
(TM-2473) accepts platinum, copper, or
alarm and shutdown functions per channel 27 0 to 20 mA 50Ω
nickel RTD sensors.
when pre-set limits are exceeded and digital 28 0 to 1 V 5M
Each channel of a triple channel module readout on demand, via the display on the 29 1 to 5 V 5M
has adjustable ALARM and TRIP set system’s Common Service Module. Note: Consult factory for other input
points which activate LED indicators and ranges, non-linear analog inputs, or for
One range and sensor type can be
relays when pre-set limits are exceeded. meter display scaled in engineering units.
specified per module, with the maxi-
The thermocouple and analog modules
mum number of ranges and sensors Input Impedance: greater than 5
have input circuits that are fully floating
determined by the monitor system. megohms for thermocouple inputs
with 500 VDC channel-to-channel
isolation to ensure high rejection of The dual channel thermocouple module Outputs:
common mode ripple and noise and to (TM-2474) accepts types K, T, J, and E a. Meter Range: (readout on
allow sensors to be grounded. The RTD grounded and ungrounded thermo- Common Service Module)
module incorporates a constant-current, couples. The dual channel process 1. Temperature: linearized in °C or
three-wire compensated bridge circuit module (TM-2475) accepts process °F, maximum scale -150° to
connected to the remote three-wire RTD analog signals proportional to a wide +1999° with resolution of
sensor. All modules have automatic built- range of variables (pressure, flow, level, ±1 degree
in sensor failure detection. etc.) in any of eight standard instrument 2. Process: consult factory for
ranges (six current and two voltage specific variables and ranges.
This feature will cause an alarm (but will ranges). The dual channel RTD module b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
inhibit shutdown) for sensor failure (TM-2477) accepts platinum, copper, or 1 digit if greater
(see specifications, Note 4). Up to five or nickel RTD sensors or selected
different outputs per module are available thermistor sensors.

3.10
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring

c. Relays: environmentally-sealed TM-2471/2/3/4/5/7 Input


(nitrogen-filled): 240 VAC, 3 A, or 300 Modules Specifications
VA maximum AC rating; 30 VDC at 3 A
or 90 W, or 30-to-220 VDC at 50 W Standard Temperature Input Ranges & Sensors:
switching maximum resistive load. Input/Display RTD Sensors Thermo-
d. Analog Outputs (rear terminal): Range 100Ω 10Ω 120Ω Couples
voltage or current ranges available; Code °C Code °F Pt Cu Ni K T J E
accuracy ±0.25% FSD (proportional 01 0 to 100 — — X X X X
to sensor response characteristics.) 02 0 to 150 12 0 to 300 X X X X X X X
Output Table 03 0 to 200 13 0 to 400 X X X X X X X
Analog 04 0 to 300 — — X X
Outputs Output 05 0 to 400 14 0 to 750 X X X X X
Code Range Load (Ω) — — 15 0 to 1000 X X X
01 0 to 1 mA 12 K max 06 0 to 600 16 0 to 1100 X X X
02 0 to 5 mA 24 K max 07 0 to 1000 17 0 to 1800 X X X
03 0 to 10 mA 1.2 K max 08 -100 to 200 18 -150 to 400 X X X X X
04 0 to 20 mA 600 max 09 -100 to 400 19 -150 to 750 X X X X X
05 1 to 5 mA 2.4 K max 10 -100 to 1000 20 -150 to 1800 X X
06 4 to 20 mA 600Ω max
07 0 to 5 VDC 25 K min
11 -100 to 1100 21 -150 to 2000 X
08 0 to 10 VDC 25 K min
09 1 to 5 VDC 25 K min Note: 1. All 100Ω Platinum RTDs calibrated using DIN standard values R212/R32F and
R100/ROC = 1.2850. All other standards must be requested.
General Performance: 2. Maximum number of ranges per systems: See VT-2490 CSM and VT-2490
a. Set points: two per channel, product descriptions.
0-100% minimum adjustment; 3. For greater resolution of analog output, input range may be reduced.
Accuracy will be ±0.25% ±1°C (°F) of range.
± 0.5°C over the range by blind-set 4. Sensor failure detection: high, high/high mode initiates alarm (not shutdown)
multi-turn potentiometers. for RTD open or short and T/C open circuit, and live zero analog inputs.
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard
(other values optional)
c. Channel Isolation: K Type K T/C Item 7 Relay Designation
1. Thermocouple and analog input T Type T T/C For triple modules only
circuits fully floating, 500 VDC J Type J T/C Code Description
channel-to-channel isolation. E Type E T/C A Alarm relay per point
2. RTD sensor inputs common to V DC Voltage T Trip relay per point
internal system 0 volts; grounded I DC Current G Group alarm and trip per module
RTDs are not recommended for
use with the VT-2490 system. Item 3 Input Range For dual modules only
3. Meter outputs common to Insert range code 01 to 29, See input R Alarm and trip relay per module
internal system 0 volts Tables, Insert ‘SS’ for Special; Two
d. Temperature Effect: span, <0.02% Ranges Maximum Per System; For
of reading/°C; zero, <0.05% degree/°C analog inputs, write in desired readout** Item 8 Relay Status
e. RFI Immunity: 27, 150, 470 MHz Code Description
max. error, 1% at 10 volts per meter. Item 4 Alarm Sequence Status E Energized for normal
Code Description D De-energized for normal
M Latching manual reset A Alarm energized/trip de-energized
TM-2471/2/3/4/5/7 A Auto reset when return to normal R Alarm de-energized/trip energized
Ordering H High for alarm
L Low for alarm
TM-247 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11 Item 9 Output Signal
Item 5 Trip Sequence Status Code Description
Item 1 Module Type Code Description
Code Description V Voltage, dual & triple modules
M Latching, manual reset I Current, dual modules only
1 Triple T/C A Auto reset when return to normal
2 Triple Analog H High for trip Item 10 Output Range
3 Triple RTD L Low for trip Insert Range Code 01 to 09, See
4 Dual T/C Output Table, General Specifications
5 Dual Analog Item 6 Alarm Trip Delay
7 Dual RTD Item 11 Options
Code Description Code Description
8 Blank DA 1 Sec. delay on alarm 00 None
Item 2 Sensor Type DT 1 Sec. delay on trip CC Conformal coating
Code Description DB 1 Sec. delay on both alarm
P 100Ω Pt RTD and trip relay **Example:I23 (0-600 PSI)
N 120Ω Ni RTD 00 Standard time delay 4-20 mA=0-600 PSI
C 10Ω Cu RTD (see specifications) 0-100% Readout

3.11
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Thrust Modules (increasing positive or negative check of the input prevents intermittent
VT-2461-T & VT-2462-TT displacement between the probe and sensor failures from falsely shutting down
(For use with VT-2490 systems) the target) activates the GROUP machinery. The associated Probe OK
ALARM relay. Similarly, a TRIP in either LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited for 10
The single-channel VT-2461-T thrust direction activates the GROUP TRIP seconds following correction of a circuit
module monitors the axial position of a relay. Factory-set relay time delays are fault condition. Proper operation is thus
rotating shaft or thrust bearing. A dual available for the ALARM and TRIP ensured. To maintain protection if AND
channel module (VT-2462-TT) is also circuits on each channel to minimize voting is selected, the VT-2462-TT
available for sophisticated monitoring of false shutdowns. automatically reverts back to OR voting
turbomachinery and for petrochemical given a sensor failure.
and refinery applications involving All relays on the module are field-
API-670 specifications. selectable for normally energized or Field-selectable “Dual Fault Shutdown
de-energized, manual or auto-reset, Protection” is also available to safe-
Common Features and system relay interfacing. Each guard machinery during rapid thrust
Many features are common to both channel can be designated to interface bearing failure. If both channels
thrust modules — for instance, two with the CSM’s GROUP ALARM and experience circuit fault within 10
fully-adjustable ALARM and TRIP set GROUP TRIP relays. For example, any seconds of each other (indicative of a
points, one for normal (active) and channel’s ALARM can also actuate the sudden thrust collar failure), TRIP will
another for counter (inactive) thrust. CSM GROUP ALARM relay if desired. be automatically initiated. No TRIP will
They activate LEDs and sealed relays More critical channels can, therefore, occur if the time interval is greater than
when pre-set limits are exceeded. The be grouped for special annunciation 10 seconds between the two faults. As
set points are arranged for easy and attention. an alternative, the module may be
operator understanding with color- jumpered to inhibit TRIP if both
coded LEDs, ID tag, and push-to-read VT-2462-TT Dual Thrust Module channels experience circuit fault.
push-button. Digital readout of thrust in A dual thrust module (VT-2462-TT)
engineering units (mils or µM) is featuring two proximity probe channels VT-2461-T & VT-2462-TT
for dual thrust monitoring. There are
supplied on demand, via the display on
four set points common to both
Specifications
the system’s common service module For the complete specifications of each
(CSM). A jumper allows field selectable channels — two (GROUP ALARM and
GROUP TRIP) for active axial position model, refer to both “General Specifi-
inversion of the sense of the probe (to cations” and the corresponding section
provide positive readout for either and two for inactive position. Conse-
quently, Channel A’s and Channel B’s of “Individual Module Specifications.”
normal or counter thrust).
ALARM set points for positive displace-
ment (active thrust) are always the Specifications
Each module also includes a module ID Inputs:
tag plus Probe OK status LED to warn same. Channel A’s and B’s TRIP set
points are also shared in this manner. a. Sensitivity: 200 mV/mil (8mV/µM)
of circuit fault. A sensor failure is or 100 mV/mil (4 mV/µM).
indicated by activating the channel’s Two group relays are offered: a
GROUP ALARM relay for an ALARM in b. Impedance: 20K ohm (single-ended,
ALARM relay and LED and the CIR- one side to system common).
CUIT-FAULT relay in the CSM, turning either direction on either Channel A or
off the channel OK LED, and disabling Channel B; and a GROUP TRIP relay
for a TRIP in either direction on Outputs:
the TRIP circuit (to prevent false a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
shutdowns). The operator can interro- Channel A AND/OR Channel B.
The GROUP TRIP relay thus provides (see Ordering section for ranges).
gate the channel through the common b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
service module to determine the nature field-selectable AND/OR voting logic
between the two channels. or 1 digit if greater.
of the fault. A wide selection of per c. Sensor Signal (front panel):
channel outputs are available from the buffered, 2K ohms.
system chassis’ rear terminal, including As an option, the VT-2462-TT can
be used as two single thrust channels d. Relays: gold-plated, environmen-
the “raw” signal and a standard analog tally-sealed (nitrogen-filled); one
signal for data processing or strip chart with the probes installed in two
different thrust bearings. In such cases, DPDT for ALARM and TRIP;
recording. Also an AC output of 240 VAC, 3 A or 300 VA maximum
the “raw” sensor signal is provided by the set points and relays are still shared
as described above. AC rating; 20 VDC at 3 A or 90 W,
a front panel jack with buffered short- or 20-to-220 VDC at 50 W switching
circuit protection. maximum resistive load.
Unique, field-selectable First-Out
annunciation is also available on the e. Relay Response Time: standard 1
VT-2461-T Single Thrust Module second for ALARM and 3 for TRIP.
The single thrust module (VT-2461-T) VT-2462-TT to assist in post-fault
diagnosis. f. Analog Outputs (rear terminal):
features one channel, which accepts voltage or current ranges available
the output signal from one proximity (see Ordering Section); accuracy
probe and driver. It provides four set The relay time delays on the VT-2462-TT
are fully field-selectable. In addition, this ±0.25% of span.
points — two (ALARM and TRIP) for
active axial position and two for inactive module has a unique circuit fault
position. An ALARM in either direction protection. A “delayed return-to-normal”

3.12
General Performance: 2. Module may be jumpered to Item 6 Dual Fault Shutdown
a. Set Points: two for normal and two inhibit TRIP if both channels Code Description
for counter thrust; 0-100% mini- experience circuit fault. X VT-2461-T, not available
mum adjustment; ±0.1% resolution; h. Analog Meter Panel: Either one or I Dual Fault inhibits trip,
±1 digit readout accuracy both channels can be continuously VT 2462-TT
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard displayed on the analog meter panel. P Dual Fault provides trip,
(other values optional). VT-2462-TT
c. Frequency Response: DC to 1 Hz I and P options are field selectable.
d. Channel Separation: 40 dB
minimum crosstalk DC to 1 Hz; Item 7 AND/OR Voting Trip CKT
sensor power supplies are buffered Code Description
and limited to 50 mA VT-2461-T & VT-2462-TT X VT-2461-T, not available
e. Temperature Effect: span, Thrust Modules Ordering A “AND”, VT-2462-TT only
< 0.03% of reading/°C; zero, O “OR”, VT-2462-TT only
< 0.03% of span/°C VT-246 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11– A and O options are field selectable.
12–13–14
Item 8 CSM Group Relay Service
Individual Module Specifications Must use one option from each group. Code Description
VT-2461-T A All relay outputs interface to
a. Relays: one DPDT for ALARM, Item 1 Module Type CSM relays VT-2461-T
one for TRIP Code Description Y “Yes”, VT-2462-TT alarm to
b. Relay Time Delays: optional 1-T Single Thrust CSM alarm
factory-set, 1-10 seconds for 2-TT Dual Thrust, API-670 N “No”, VT-2462-TT alarm to
ALARM and TRIP Conformance CSM alarm
c. Set Points: four
Item 2 Module Range Item 9 Relay Status
1. Two (ALARM and TRIP) for
Code Description Code Description
active axial thrust
33 15-0-15 mils E Normally energized
2. Two for inactive thrust
34 25-0-25 mils D Normally de-energized
35 30-0-30 mils A Alarm energized/trip
VT-2462-TT
36 40-0-40 micrometers de-energized VT-2462-TT only
a. Relays: one DPDT per channel; a
37 400-0-400 micrometers R Alarm de-energized/trip
GROUP ALARM for an ALARM in
38 600-0-600 micrometers energized VT-2462-TT only
either direction on either Channel A
39 750-0-750 micrometers
or Channel B; and GROUP TRIP for Item 10 Relay Time Delay
40 1000-0-1000 micrometers
a TRIP in either direction on VT-2461 Only
41 Unlisted ranges
Channel A AND/OR Channel B. Code Description
Consult Factory
b. Relay Time Delays: field selectable 01-10 Alarm time delay in seconds
ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5 Item 3 Analog Output (ex: 01) VT-2461-T (01 sec. std.)
second intervals; field-selectable Code Description 01-10 Trip time delay in seconds
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second 01 Current analog 0-1 mA (ex: 03) VT-2461-T (03 sec. std.)
intervals. 02 Current analog 0-5 mA Delay is factory set only.
c. Set Points: four common to both 03 Current analog 0-10 mA
channels. 04 Current analog 0-20 mA Item 11 Relay Time Delay
d. First-Out (field-selectable): the LED 05 Current analog 1-5 mA VT-2462 Only
of the first channel to ALARM (or to 06 Current analog 4-20 mA Code Description
TRIP) flashes. 07 Voltage analog 0-5 VDC 0.5-8.0 Alarm in 0.5 second intervals
e. Voting Logic (TRIP circuit): field- 08 Voltage analog 0-10 VDC 01-16 Trip in 1.0 second intervals
selectable AND/OR voting. 09 Voltage analog 1-5 VDC Delay is field alterable for VT-2462-TT.
f. Circuit Fault Protection: a “delayed
return-to-normal” check of the input Item 4 Relay Designation Item 12 Input Sensitivity
prevents intermittent sensor failures Code Description Code Description
from falsely shutting down machin- G Group alarm & group 1 100 mV/mil
ery. trip per module 2 200 mV/mil
g. Dual fault shutdown protection (field Item 5 Relay Sequence Item 13 Probe Drive Voltage
selectable): Code Description Code Description
1. If both channels experience M Latching, manual reset 1 -24 VDC at 40 mA
circuit fault within 10 seconds of A Auto reset when return 2 -18 VDC at 40 mA
each other, TRIP will be auto- to normal
matically initiated. No TRIP will Item 14 Options
occur if time interval is greater Code Description
than 10 seconds. 00 None
CC Conformal coating

3.13
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Seismic Modules employed with the measured acceleration General Specifications
VT-2463-SS & VT-2464-SS monitored in “g’s” (or M/S2) on one channel Inputs:
(For use with VT-2490 systems) and velocity in “in/sec” (or mm/sec) on the a. Sensitivity: accelerometer (or
other, using integration. charge amplifier): 100 mV/g
Common Features (10mV/M/S2) or 10 mV/g (1 mV/M/S2).
Many features are common to both seismic All relays on both modules are field- Velocity pickup: 100 mV/in/sec
modules. There are two separate monitor- selectable for normally energized or de- (3.94 mV/mm/sec) or 195 mV/in/sec
ing channels, each with two fully-adjustable energized, manual or auto-reset, system (7.68 mV/mm/sec).
set points, ALARM and TRIP, grouped for relay interfacing, and system Start-up b. Impedance: 20 K ohm nominal
easy operator understanding with color- Control interfacing. These last two (single-ended, one side to
coded LEDs, ID tag, and push-to-read features provide special system flexibility. system common).
engineering units (g, M/S2, in/sec, or mm/ Each channel can be designated to
sec) on the digital display of the system interface with the CSM’s GROUP Outputs:
common service module (CSM). ALARM and GROUP TRIP relays. For a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
example, a channel’s ALARM can also (see Ordering section for ranges).
Each module also includes a module ID actuate the GROUP ALARM relay. More b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
tag plus Probe OK status LEDs to critical channels can, therefore, be or 1 digit (if greater).
indicate circuit fault. A sensor failure is grouped for special annunciation and c. Sensor Signal (front panel):
indicated by the OK LED off and the attention. Similarly, each channel’s relays buffered, 2K ohms.
ALARM LED on. The defective channel’s can be linked to the system Start-up d. Relays: gold-plated, environmentally-
TRIP relay (if any) is disarmed to prevent Control (x2, x3, or Inhibit) to ensure sealed (nitrogen filled), 240 VAC,
false shutdowns while the ALARM relay maximum protection during run-ups 3 A or 300 VA maximum AC rating;
and/or CIRCUIT FAULT relay in the without false shutdowns. 30 VDC at 2 A or 90 W or 30 to
common service module activates to 220 VDC at 50 W switching maximum
warn of the fault. The channel can then VT-2463-SS Module resistive load.
be interrogated via the CSM to verify On the VT-2463-SS, one sealed relay is e. Start-up Control: voltage free
sensor failure and assist in troubleshoot- supplied per channel, assignable to operator contact on rear of CSM for
ing. Two front panel jacks with buffered channel ALARM or TRIP or GROUP x2, x3, or Inhibit of ALARM and TRIP
sensor signal outputs are offered for ALARM and GROUP TRIP. Factory-set f. Relay Response Time: 1 second
interfacing with portable analyzers. In relay time delays are available for the for ALARM and 3 for TRIP, standard.
addition, each channel has a wide ALARM and TRIP circuits on each g. Analog Outputs (rear terminal):
selection of voltage and current analog channel to minimize false shutdowns. voltage or current ranges available
outputs available on the rear of the VT-2464-SS Module (see Ordering Section); accuracy
system chassis. The seismic module (VT-2464-SS) ±0.25% of span
features two sealed relays per channel h. Transducers Power Supply:
A number of different transducers can be
(one for ALARM and one for TRIP). +24 VDC compliance at 2 or 4 mA
used with SS modules, including
First-Out annunciation is provided to constant current for 2- or 3-wire
integrated accelerometers (for tempera-
make post-fault diagnosis easier — the input; also +24, -24, and -18 VDC at
tures less than 250°F/120°C), charge
LED of the first channel to go into 50 mA maximum.
accelerometers with charge amplifiers or
line-drivers (for temperatures higher than ALARM (and similarly into TRIP) flashes, Transfer Performance:
250°F/120°C) and any type of velocity while subsequent alarms will have a. Set Points: two per channel,
pickup. Power for each sensor is continuously lit LEDs. 0-100% minimum adjustment;
provided on its one input/output cable. The relay time delays on the per-channel ±0.1% resolution; ±1 digit readout
ALARM and TRIP circuits are fully field- accuracy.
Each channel also offers a choice of
selectable. In addition, VT-2464 modules b. Deadband: 0.5% standard (other
vibration detection and display options:
have a unique form of circuit fault values optional).
for rub and imbalance problems, peak
protection. A “delayed return-to-normal” c. Frequency vs. Amplitude
detection and display of the vibration are
check of the input prevents intermittent Response: ±2% 7.5 Hz to 6 kHz;
standard; for anti-friction bearings and
sensor failures from falsely shutting down sensor power supplies are buffered
where noise or turbulence is present, true
machinery. The associated Probe OK and limited to 50 mA.
RMS detection and display (or average
LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited for 10 e. Parameter Selection: peak, true
detection and peak display) are standard.
seconds following correction of a circuit RMS, or average detection and
Sharp, precision filtering (low, high and
fault condition, which indicates proper display of g, in/sec, M/S2, mm/sec;
bandpass) is available to focus the
operation. peak detection with peak-to-peak
monitoring protection on specific problems
display of mils and µM.
occurring at particular frequencies.
f. Integration: acceleration to velocity,
Both modules are capable of either single or Seismic Module velocity to displacement.
dual-path monitoring. In dual path monitor- Specifications g. Filter: 24 dB/octave roll-off, low,
ing, a single sensor provides inputs to both For the complete specifications of each high and band-pass.
channels with different ranges and/or model, refer to both “General Specifica- h. Temperature Effect: span, <0.03%
parameters. An accelerometer is usually tions” and the corresponding section of of reading/°C; zero, <0.03% of
“Individual Module Specifications.” span/°C.

3.14
Individual Module Specifications 72 0 to 2000 M/S2 Item 11 Integration Channel B
VT-2463-SS 73 0 to 0.3 in/sec Code Description
a. Relays: one DPDT per channel 74 0 to 0.5 in/sec X None
75 0 to 1.0 in/sec V Acceleration to velocity
b. Relay Time Delays: optional 76 0 to 3.0 in/sec D Velocity to displacement
factory-set, 1-10 seconds for 77 0 to 8 mm/sec
ALARM and TRIP. 78 0 to 12.5 mm/sec Item 12 Sensor Sensitivity Channel A
79 0 to 25 mm/sec Code Description
VT-2464-SS 80 0 to 50 mm/sec 1 100 mV/g
a. Relays: one SPDT and one DPDT 81 Unlisted ranges (C/F) 2 50 mV/g
per channel. ALARM is field 3 10 mV/g
*For peak-to-peak displacement, see 4 100 mV/in/sec
selectable to be either the SPDT or Displacement Module PDB, Codes 42-54 5 195 mV/in/sec
the DPDT relay (with TRIP being the 6 Other inputs (consult factory)
other). Other relay voting available. **Available only with 10 mV/g or special sensor.
Please consult the factory. Item 13 Sensor Sensitivity Channel B
Code Description
b. Relay Time Delays: field selectable Item 3 Channel B Range 1 100 mV/g
ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5 Code Description 2 50 mV/g
second intervals; field selectable 42-80 See listing in Item 2 3 10 mV/g
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second 81 Unlisted ranges (C/F) 4 100 mV/in/sec
intervals. Item 4 Analog Output 5 195 mV/in/sec
Code Description 6 Other inputs (consult factory)
c. First-Out: the LED of the first D Dual path, one sensor input to both
channel to go into ALARM (and 01 0-1 mA
02 0-5 mA channels A and B
similarly into TRIP) flashes.
03 0-10 mA Item 14 Sensors Power Supply
d. Circuit Fault Protection: a “delayed 04 0-20 mA Code Description
return-to-normal” check. 05 1-5 mA 0 Velocity pick-up
e. Analog Meter Panel: either or both 06 4-20 mA 1 -24 VDC at 40 mA
channels can be continuously 07 0-5 VDC 2 -18 VDC at 40 mA
displayed on the analog meter panel. 08 0-10 VDC 3 4 mA compliance at +18 VDC
09 1-5 VDC 4 Non-Ametek sensors
Item 5 Relay Designation Item 15 Detection/Display Mode
Code Description Code Description
VT-2463 only 1 Peak detection and display
A Alarm relay per channel 2 True RMS detection and display
VT-2463-SS and VT-2464- T Trip relay per channel 3 Average detection and display
G Group Alarm/Trip per module 4 Special
SS Seismic Modules VT-2464 only
Ordering 1 SPDT alarm, DPDT trip per channel Item 16 Filter
(–3dB Frequencies in Hz Listed–consult
VT-246 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11–12– 2 DPDT alarm, SPDT trip per channel factory for additional frequencies)
13–14–15–16–17–18–19 Low Pass 50, 75, 100, 250, 500, 1000,
Item 6 Relay Sequence 2500, 20,000, x (none)
Must use one option from each group. Code Description High Pass 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 250, 2500,
M Latching, manual reset x (none)
Item 1 Module Type A Auto reset when return to normal Band-Pass (List both above, 1:10
Code Description
Item 7 Relay Time Delay ratio of Low/high recommended)
3 1 relay per channel, factory set
relay time delays VT-2463 Only Item 17 Start Up Control Selection
4 2 relays per channel, API-670 Code Description Code Description
conformance 01-10 Alarm, factory set (01 sec. std.) 1 Inhibit alarm and trip relay
01-10 Trip, factory set (03 sec. std.) 3 x3 increase in set point levels
Item 2 Channel A Range
Item 8 Relay Time Delay 4 None
Code Description
Range* VT-2464 Only Item 18 CSM Group Relay Interface
55 0 to 3g Code Description Code Description
56 0 to 5g 0.5-8.0 Alarm 0.5 second intervals, A All relay drive outputs
57 0 to 10g field alterable interface to CSM relays
58 0 to 15g 01-16 Trip 1.0 second intervals, VT-2463-SS only
59 0 to 20g field alterable Y Alarm to CSM alarm
60** 0 to 30g N No alarm to CSM alarm
61** 0 to 50g Item 9 Relay Status
Code Description Y Trip to CSM trip
62** 0 to 75g N No trip to CSM trip
63** 0 to 250g E Normally energized
64 0 to 30 M/S2 D Normally de-energized Item 19 Options
65 0 to 50 M/S2 A Alarm energized/trip de-energized Code Description
66 0 to 100 M/S2 R Alarm de-energized/trip energized 00 None
67 0 to 150 M/S2 Item 10 Integration Channel A CC Conformal coating
68 0 to 200 M/S2 Code Description
69 0 to 300 M/S2 X None
70 0 to 500 M/S2 V Acceleration to velocity
71 0 to 750 M/S2 D Velocity to displacement

3.15
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Displacement Modules All relays on Ametek displacement modules Outputs:
VT-2463-XY & VT-2464- are field-selectable for normally energized or a. Meter Output to CSM Display: (see
XY; VT-2463-PP & de-energized, manual or auto-resent, system Ordering section for ranges).
relay interfacing and system start-up control b. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.25% FS
VT-2464-PP interfacing. Each channel can be designated or 1 digit (if greater).
(For use with VT-2490 systems) to interface with the CSM’s GROUP ALARM c. Sensor Signal (front panel): buffered.
Ametek has several different modules and GROUP TRIP relays. For example, any d. Relays: gold-plated, environmen-
that monitor vibration displacement. channel’s ALARM can also actuate the tally-sealed (nitrogen filled), 240 VAC,
The VT-2463 modules are available in GROUP ALARM relay. More critical channels 3 A or 300 VA maximum AC rating;
either XY or PP versions. The XY can, therefore, be grouped for special 30 VDC at 3 A or 90 W or 30-to-220
modules are for X-Y proximity monitor- annunciation and attention. Similarly, each VDC at 50 W switching maximum
ing, using two proximity probes 90° channel’s relays can be linked to the system resistive load.
apart. AND/OR channel voting logic is start-up control (x2, x3, or Inhibit) to ensure e. Start-up Control: voltage free
supplied on the TRIP circuits for maximum protection during run-ups without operator contact on rear of CSM for
minimizing false shutdowns. The PP false shutdowns. x2, x3, or Inhibit of relays.
versions are for two channels of single- f. Relay Time Delays: standard 1
VT-2463-XY and -PP Modules
axis proximity monitoring. They are second for ALARM and 3 for TRIP.
On the VT-2463s, one sealed relay is
identical to the XY modules, except that g. Analog Outputs (rear terminals):
supplied per channel, assignable to
they utilize normal OR voting logic (not voltage or current ranges available
channel ALARM or TRIP or module
AND/OR) on the TRIP circuits. Ametek also (see Ordering Section); accuracy
GROUP ALARM and GROUP TRIP.
offers another module series (VT-2464) in ±0.25% of span.
Relay time delays are available for the
XY and PP versions with two sealed relays ALARM and TRIP circuits on each Transfer Performance:
per unit. channel to minimize false shutdowns. a. Set Points: two per channel,
Common Features The delay time is factory-set. 0-100% minimum adjustment;
There are two separate monitoring ±0.1% resolution; ±1 digit readout
VT-2464-XY and -PP Modules
channels per module and each channel accuracy.
The VT-2464-XY and -PP feature two
can accept one sensor input with b. Deadband: 0.5% standard
sealed relays per channel (one for
power for the sensor supplied from the (other values optional).
ALARM and one for TRIP). First-Out
system chassis. The peak-to-peak c. Frequency vs. Amplitude
annunciation is provided to make post-
vibration level is shown on demand in Response: ±2% 7.5 Hz to 5 kHz;
fault diagnosis easier — the LED of the
easy-to-read engineering units (mils or ±10% 3.5 Hz to 10 kHz; -3 dB 16 kHz.
first channel to go into ALARM (and
µM) on the digital display of the system d. Channel Separation: 40 dB
similarly into TRIP) flashes, while
common service module (CSM). Also minimum crosstalk DC to 20 kHz;
subsequent alarms will have continu-
provided on a per-channel basis are sensor power supplies are buffered
ously lit LEDs.
two fully-adjustable set points, ALARM and limited to 50 mA.
and TRIP, arranged for easy operator The relay time delays on the VT-2464’s e. Temperature Effect: span, <0.03%
understanding with color-coded LEDs, ALARM and TRIP circuits are fully field- of reading/°C; zero, <0.03% of
ID tag, and push-to-read push-button. selectable. In addition, these modules span/°C.
have a unique form of circuit fault
Each module also includes a module ID Individual Module Specifications
protection. A “delayed return-to-
tag plus Probe OK status LEDs to VT-2463-PP
normal” check of the input prevents
indicate circuit fault. A sensor failure is a. Relays: one DPDT per channel
intermittent sensor failures from falsely
indicated by the OK LED going out and b. Relay Time Delays: optional
shutting down machinery. The associ-
the ALARM LED coming on. The factory-set, 1-10 seconds for
ated Probe OK LED flashes and TRIP is
defective channel’s TRIP relay (if any) is ALARM and for TRIP.
inhibited for 10 seconds following
disarmed to prevent false shutdowns correction of a circuit fault condition, VT-2463-XY
while the ALARM relay and/or CIRCUIT which indicates proper operation. a. Relays: one DPDT per channel.
FAULT relay in the common service b. Relay Time Delays: optional
module activates to warn of the fault. factory-set, 1-10 seconds for
The channel can then be interrogated Displacement Modules
ALARM and for TRIP.
via the CSM to verify sensor failure and Specifications c. Voting Logic: TRIP circuits are
assist in troubleshooting. XY versions For the complete specifications of each factory-set to either OR or AND
set for AND voting of the TRIP circuits model, refer to both “General Specifi- voting logic.
automatically revert back to the OR cations” and the corresponding section
mode in the event of a sensor failure. of “Individual Module Specifications.” VT-2464-PP
Two front panel jacks with buffered a. Relays: one SPDT and one DPDT
sensor signal outputs are offered for General Specifications per channel. ALARM is field-
interfacing with portable analyzers. In Inputs: selectable to be either the SPDT or
addition, each channel has a wide a. Sensitivity: 200 mV/mil (8 mV/µM) the DPDT relay (with TRIP being the
selection of current or voltage analog or 100 mV/mil (4 mV/µM). other).
outputs available on the rear of the b. Impedance: 20 K ohm (single- b. Relay Time Delays: field-selectable
system’s chassis. ended, one side to system 0 V). ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5

3.16
second intervals; field-selectable Item 2 Proximity Monitoring Item 7 Relay Sequence
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second Code Description Code Description
intervals. XY X-Y proximity modules M Latching, manual reset
c. First-Out: the LED of the first PP 2 channels of single axis A Auto reset when return to normal
channel to go into ALARM (and proximity monitoring
similarly into TRIP) flashes.
Item 3 Module Range Item 8 Relay Status
d. Probe OK: the associated Probe
Code Description Code Description
OK LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited
Range Peak-to-Peak E Normally energized
for 10 seconds following correction
42 0 to 3 mils D Normally de-energized
of a circuit fault condition.
43 0 to 5 mils A Alarm energized/trip
e. Analog Meter Panel: either or both
44 0 to 10 mils de-energized
channels can be continuously
45 0 to 15 mils R Alarm de-energized/trip
displayed on the analog meter panel.
46 0 to 20 mils energized
VT-2464-XY 47 0 to 30 mils
Item 9 Relay Time Delay
a. Relays: one SPDT and one DPDT 48 0 to 80 µM
VT-2463 Only
per channel. ALARM is field- 49 0 to 125 µM
Code Description
selectable to be either the SPDT or 50 0 to 400 µM
01-10 Alarm, factory set in seconds,
the DPDT relay (with TRIP being the 52 0 to 600 µM
VT-2463 only (01sec. std.)
other). 53 0 to 750 µM
01-10 Trip, factory set in seconds,
b. Relay Time Delays: field selectable 54 Special ranges (C/F)
VT-2463 only (03 sec. std.)
ALARM, 0.5-8.0 seconds in 0.5
second intervals; field-selectable Item 4 Analog Output
Item 10 Relay Time Delay
TRIP, 1-16 seconds in 1 second (Rear Terminal)
VT-2464 Only
intervals Code Description
Code Description
c. First-Out: the LED of the first 01 0-1 mA
0.5-8.0 Alarm, field alterable, .5
channel to go into ALARM (and 02 0-5 mA
second interval, VT-2462 only
similarly into TRIP) flashes. 03 0-10 mA
01-16 Trip, field alterable 1 second
d. Probe OK: the associated Probe 04 0-20 mA
interval, VT-2464 only
OK LED flashes and TRIP is inhibited 05 1-5 mA
for 10 seconds following correction 06 4-20 mA Item 11 Input Sensitivity
of a circuit fault condition. 07 0-5 VDC Code Description
e. Analog Meter Panel: either or both 08 0-10 VDC 1 100 mV/mil
channels can be continuously 09 1-5 VDC 2 200 mV/mil
displayed on the analog meter panel. Item 5 Relay Designation Item 12 Probe Driver Voltage
f. Voting Logic: the TRIP circuits have Code Description Code Description
field-selectable AND/OR voting logic. VT-2463 Only 1 -24 VDC at 40 mA
A Alarm relay per channel, 2 -18 VDC at 40 mA
VT-2463-PP only
T Trip relay per channel, Item 13 Start Up Control Selection
VT-2463-PP only Code Description
R Alarms “OR” voting/trips 1 Inhibit alarm and trip relay
“OR” voting 2 x3 increase in set point levels
N Alarms “OR” voting/trips 4 None
“AND” voting Item 14 CSM Group Relay Interface
Displacement Modules VT2464 only Code Description
B Alarm and trip relay per A All relay drive outputs
VT-2463-XY, VT-2464-XY, channel interface to CSM relays,
VT-2463-PP, VT-2464-PP R Alarms “OR” voting/trips VT-2463-SS only
Ordering “OR” voting Y Alarm to CSM alarm,
N Alarms “OR” voting/trips VT-2464 only
VT-246 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8–9–10–11– “AND” voting N No alarm to CSM alarm,
12–13–14–15 VT-2464 only
Item 6 Relay Selection
Must use option from each group. VT-2464 Only Y Trip to CSM trip, VT-2464
Code Description only
Item 1 Module Type 1 SPDT alarm, DPDT trip N No trip to CSM trip,
Code Description 2 DPDT alarm, SPDT trip VT-2464 only
3 One relay per channel, X Not available for VT-2463
factory set relay time delays Item 15 Options
4 2 relays per channel, 1st out Code Description
indication, field selectable 00 None
delay, API-670 conformance CC Conformal coating

3.17
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Tachometer Module Outputs: Speed set point must be above the
VT-2466-TK a. Integral Displays minimum pulses per second input
(For use with VT-2490 systems) 1. Displays revolutions per minute. rate (0.2 pps). The Zero-Speed LED
Displays set points when set (yellow) will be ON when the input is
point select button is pushed. below the set point.
2. Red LED digits 0.4" (10 mm) d. Analog Outputs
high. 1. Non-isolated.
3. Fullscale is 19,999 RPM (rev/ 2. Fullscale RPM can be selected at
min.). 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000,
4. Accuracy is ±0.1% of fullscale 6,000, 10,000, 15,000, 20,000.
±1 digit. Note: Fullscale for 3. Accuracy — ±0.1% of fullscale.
analog outputs and set points is 4. Outputs — 4-20 mA; 1-5 V (500
adjustable, but fullscale of display ohm impedance); etc.
is always 19,999 with a 5% 5. Overrange — analog output can
overrange capability. exceed fullscale value by 5%.
b. Alarm Trip Output Contacts e. Other Outputs
1. Four set points available. 1. A conditioned input signal (12 V
2. Individual settings for abnormal through 1 K ohm) is available on
state to be above or below the front panel jack.
set point. 2. For certain types of inputs, a
VT-2466-TK tachometer modules
3. Two form C contacts per set point. Probe OK signal is generated.
provide continuous monitoring of shaft
4. Output relays can be individually This controls a green front panel
speed (RPM) when used in Ametek
selected to be normally energized LED. When not OK, ALARM #1 is
Series VT-2490 machine monitoring
or normally de-energized. forced to abnormal state and all
systems. Each features its own indepen-
5. An LED per point is provided to other set point outputs are
dent, continuous digital display of shaft
indicate that output is in the inhibited. Probe Not OK can be
speed from 0.1 to 19,999 RPM in large
abnormal state. Two yellow and connected to the Not OK bus.
easy-to-read digits. A Ametek tachom-
two red LEDs are standard. 3. When probe Not OK is detected,
eter module accepts an input from a
6. Each set point can be individually the last reading will be held on
proximity probe, magnetic pick-up or a
selected to drive the Reflash bus display until Probe OK is
fiber optic light source and provides
and the GROUP TRIP or the restored.
power to the sensor as needed.
GROUP ALARM bus.
7. Each set point can be latched in Temperature Range
The VT-2466-TK plugs into any two
the abnormal state, requiring a. Storage:
adjacent VT-2490 chassis spaces. Four
manual reset or it can automati- -20 to +65°C (-4° to 149°F)
independent set points and relays are
cally reset when input returns b. Operating: -20 to +60°C
available for ALARM or TRIP of under
to normal. (-4° to 140°F)
or over speed conditions. A fifth set
8. Set point accuracy is the same c. Accuracy Effects:
point with relay is dedicated to Zero-
as display accuracy. 1. Display: 0.005%/°C
Speed detection.
9. Resolution of set point is 0.5% 2. Analog Output: 0.15%/°C
of fullscale selected for 3. Set Points : -0.01%/°C
Tachometer Module analog output.
Specifications 10. The set point is the input value
where output changes state Pulse Input Range
Inputs:
when input is going from low to a. The selected fullscale, the pulses
a. Rate: pulse rate, 0.2 to 10,000 per
high. When input goes from high per revolution, and the zero speed
second; pulses per revolution, 1 to
to low, output will change state at per point must be selected to be
255.
a point 0.5% below set point. within the 0.2 to 10,000 pulse per
b. Sensitivity: 0.5 V to 24 V; sensitivity
c. Zero-Speed: A fifth set point is second operating range. The
is automatically adjusted as a
provided and is dedicated to the following equations are useful for
function of the amplitude of the input
Zero-Speed function. It has all of the checking these values:
signal.
c. Shape: sine, square, triangle, or features of the other set points
except for the set point range. The max. no. of pulses per rev. =
1% duty cycle pulse. (10 microsec-
Zero-Speed can be set from 0.1 to 600,000 Fullscale RPM min.
onds minimum pulse width.)
25.5 RPM in 0.1 RPM steps. The set RPM = 12 pulses per revolution
d. Offset: from +15 to -24 VDC.
e. Impedance: greater than 10,000 point is the input value at which the
Zero-Speed output changes state b. Display will show actual RPM
ohms.
when the input is going from high to regardless of fullscale setting as
f. Probe drive: +15, -18, -24 V.
low. When going from low to high, long as input rate is within the
the Zero-Speed will change state at 5 allowable range (0.2 to 10,000
times the set point. Note: The Zero- pulses per second) and display
capacity has not been exceeded (1
to 21,000 RPM).

3.18
Optional Sensor Sensitivity VT-2466-TK Tachometer
A differential input preamplifier can be Module Ordering Items 8, 9, 10, 11 (Pick ABCDE for
used when the input signal is expected each setpoint)
to be less than 0.5 V. This amplifier is Set Point Configurations
provided as an independent circuit. The VT-2466-TK —1—2—3—4—5—6— A Set point number
input signal is connected to the rear ØALDN (7)— ABCDE (8)— ABCDE (9)— Code Description
terminal designated as pre-amp inputs. setpoint setpoint (1, 2, 3, 4)
The pre-amp output is brought to the 1 2
rear terminals and can be wired to the B Relay Sequence
conventional input terminals. ABCDE (10) – ABCDE (11) – 12–13–14 Code Description
setpoint setpoint N Latching, manual reset
3 4 A Auto reset when return to
normal
Must use one option from each group.
C Set Point Level Status
Item 1 Pulse Per Revolution Code Description
Code Description H Over speed relay act.
1-255 Pulse Rate L Under speed relay act.

Item 2 Sensor Input D Relay Status


Code Description Code Description
1 -24 VDC proximity probe E Normally energized
2 -18 VDC proximity probe D Normally de-energized
3 Magnetic pickup
4 Fiber optic light source E CSM Relay Designation
5 Special inputs Code Description
A S.P. actuates CSM reflash
Item 3 Sensor Sensitivity group alarm
Code Description R S.P. actuates CSM group trip
1 0.5-24 V peak relay
2 0.05-0.5 V peak N S.P. does not actuate CSM
relay
Item 4 Pulse Trigger Designation
Code Description Item 12 (no choice)
N Negative Code Description
P Positive 1 Probe failure actuates setpoint
1 relay
Item 5 Full Scale Range
(RPM x 1000) Item 13 CSM Probe OK
Code Description Relay Designation
(1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 15, 20) Code Description
(Max. display: 19,999 RPM) A Probe failure actuates CSM
probe OK relay

Item 6 Analog Output Item 14 Options


Code Description Code Description
01 0-1 mA 00 None
02 0-5 mA CC Conformal coating
03 0-10 mA
04 0-20 mA
05 1-5 mA
06 4-20 mA
07 0-5 VDC
08 0-10 VDC
09 1-5 VDC

Item 7 Zero Speed (no choice)


Zero speed Set Point is
factory set + ØALDN

3.19
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2479 Dual VT-2469 Dual VT-2479 & VT-2469
2-Wire Transmitter 2-Wire Transmitter Specifications
Detector Modules Detector Modules Number of Channels: Two
(For use with VT-2490 systems) (For use with VT-2490 systems) Supply to 2-Wire Transmitter
+25 VDC ±1 V Current limited at 40 mA
Module VT-2479 Module VT-2469 ±4 mA Ripple and noise 50 mV PK to PK
VT-2479 is a general purpose 2-wire VT-2469 is a variant of the VT-2479
transmitter dual channel detector specially intended for use with the Inputs from 2-Wire Transmitter
module. It provides stabilized, current- Ametek VT-3360 Vibration Transmitter. VT-2479: 4-20 mA DC terminated into
limited 24 volt DC supplies suitable for In addition to the features of the VT- 100 ohm input monitoring resistor with
powering 4-20 mA electrical loops. 2479, the VT-2469 separates the AC scaled readout in engineering units
current analog of the vibration (if on CSM.
Each channel has adjustable ALARM selected on the VT-3360), conditions
and TRIP set points, which activate and amplifies it to a standardized VT-2469: 4-20 mA DC terminated into
LED indicators and relays when the sensitivity of 1 V/inch per second (80 100 ohm input monitoring resistor.
pre-set limits are exceeded. Built-in mV/mm per second) and presents it as (Optional — 0-800 µA AC vibration
loop failure detection inhibits trip action a buffered output to the miniature BNC analog signal (if selected from VT-3360))
if the loop current falls below 1.4 mA. jacks on the front panel, for signal
(Loop failure is indicated by operation analysis purposes. Corresponding to range: 0.5, 0-1.0, or
of the alarm indicator and relay.) All 2.0 in/sec (0-12, 0-25 or 0-50 mm(sec))
relays are field selectable for normally Individual green “OK” LEDs are used to
energized or de-energized, manual or indicate a healthy loop circuit and these Output sensitivity: 1.0V = 1.0 in/sec =
auto-reset and system relay interfacing. are extinguished if a fault is detected. In 25 mm/sec
The latter feature enables individual this case the TRIP relay is inhibited,
channels to be designated to be while the group “OK” relay in the CSM Outputs
interfaced with the CSM’s GROUP is activated. This sequence of opera- a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
ALARM and GROUP TRIP relays, thus tion is designed to conform with that of (calibration accuracy 0.25% FS or
allowing critical channels to be grouped other Ametek vibration detector ±1 digit)
for special annunciation and action. modules which might be installed in the b. ALARM (SPDT) and TRIP (DPDT)
system. Relays: optional DPDT contact
• Inputs from standard 2-wire for ALARM if remote select feature
transmitters • All VT-2479 features, plus not used.
• 24V loop supply and self-check inputs from VT-3360 2-wire c. Relay Contact Rating: gold plated
• Two set points LEDs and relays vibration transmitter environmentally sealed (nitrogen filled)
(ALARM and TRIP) per channel • “OK” LED (loop healthy) 240 VAC 3A or 300 VA max AC
• Choice of analog outputs • Readout in velocity units rating: 30 VDC 3A or 90W or 30 to
• System readout in engineering (in/s or mm/s) 220 VDC 50W switching max DC
units • Buffered normalized vibration rating (resistive load) contact
signal on front panel configuration.
• Choice of analog outputs d. Relay Response Time: 100 mS for
ALARM 250 mS for trip (for other
delays contact factory)
e. Sensor Signal (VT-2469): buffered
1 V/inch per sec (80 mV/mm
per second)
f. Analog Outputs: rear terminals (see
OUTPUT TABLE) accuracy ± 0.25%
of span.

General Performance
a. Set Points: two per channel 0-100%
minimum adjustment, ±0.1%
resolution, ±1 digit readout accuracy.
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard (others
optional)
c. Frequency response: (VT-2469)
3 Hz to 20 kHz
d. Temperature effect: span 0.01%
reading/°C, zero 0.01% of span/°C

3.20
VT-2479 & VT-2469 Item 10 Item 3 Relay Time Delay (seconds)
Ordering Code Description Code Description
Y/N Alarm CSM alarm relay 00 Standard
DA 1 Sec Alarm
VT-2479 Ordering Item 11 Output Range DT 1 Sec Trip
See DB 1 Sec Alarm & Trip
VT-2479 I — 1— 2— 3 — 4 —5— 6 Table Insert range code 01 to 09
— 7 —8—9— 10— 11—12— 13 Item 4 Relay Designation
Item 12 Code Description
Code Description R Alarm and trip relay per point
Item 1 Input Range (4-20mA) CC Conformal Coating
Code Description Item 5 Relay Status
23 Insert range Item 13 Engineering Unit Code Description
Readout Range E Energized for normal
Item 2 Alarm Sequence (max. full scale ± 1999.) D De-energized for normal
Code Description Note: For engineering unit readout, A Alarm energized/trip de-
M Latching, manual reset state overall range and units of energized
A Auto reset when return to measure (i.e. 0-2000 PSIG, 0-200 R Alarm de-energized/trip
normal GPM etc.) energized
Item 3 Alarm Level Status Item 6
Code Description VT-2469 Ordering Code Description
H High for alarm Y/N Trip to CSM trip relay
L Low for alarm
VT-2469 TW–VT-2479—I—1—2—3—
Item 7
Item 4 Trip Sequence 4—5—6—7—8—9
Code Description
Code Description Y/N Alarm to CSM alarm relay
M Latching, manual reset
A Auto reset when return to Item 1 Input Range
Item 8 Output Range
normal Code Description
Code Description
74 0-0.5 in/sec
See
Item 5 Trip Level Status 75 0-1. in/sec
Table Insert range code 01 to 09
Code Description 76 2.0 in/sec
H High for trip 78 0-12.5 mm/sec
Item 9
L Low for trip 79 0-25.0 mm/sec
Code Description
80 0-50.0 mm/sec
CC Conformal coating
Item 6 Relay Time Delay (seconds)
Code Description Item 2 Relay Sequence
00 Standard (see specifications) Code Description
DA 1 Sec Alarm M Latching, manual reset
DT 1 Sec Trip A Auto reset when return
DB 1 Sec Alarm & Trip to normal

Item 7 Relay Designation


Code Description
R Alarm and trip relay per point

Item 8 Relay Status


Code Description Output Table
E Energized for normal
D De-energized for normal Code Analog Outputs Range Output Load (Ω)
A Alarm energized/trip de-
energized 01 0 to 1 mA 12 K max
R Alarm de-energized/trip 02 0 to 5 mA 2.4 K max
energized 03 0 to 10 mA 1.2 K max
04 0 to 20 mA 600 max
Item 9 05 1 to 5 mA 2.4 K max
Code Description 06 4 to 20 mA 600 Ω max
Y/N Trip to CSM trip relay 07 0 to 5 VDC 25 K min
08 0 to 10 VDC 25 K min
09 1 to 5 VDC 25 K min

3.21
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
VT-2467-EC Circuit Fault/Probe OK Item 5 Relay Status
Eccentricity Module a. Probe OK LED (Green) will go off Code Description
(For use with VT-2490 systems) upon detection of input circuit fault. E Normally energized
The Single Channel Module provides Associated OK relay will actuate in D Normally de-energized
true peak-to-peak eccentricity monitor- the CSM. Probe OK relay in CSM A Alarm energized/trip ener-
ing of rotor/shaft bow at slow roll can be disabled for this module by gized
conditions. It measures bent or bowed removal of jumper. R Alarm re-energized/trip
shafts rotating at speeds as low as 1/2 energized
Optional Analog Meter Panel
RPM. It is designed so that only one The output of the module can be Item 6 Relay Time Delay
proximity probe is required for its use. displayed on a continuous analog (Factory set in seconds)
meter (optional) Code Description
01 - 03 (std. 01) Alarm
VT-2467-EC Probe Driver Power Supply: -24 VDC 01 - 03 (std. 03) Trip
Specifications or -18 VDC source, current limited
Item 7 Input Sensitivity
Inputs: one per module. Start-Up Control Code Description
a. Sensitivity: 200 mV/mil (8 mV/µM) No alarm action until 1.5 revolutions have 1 100 mV/mil
or 100 mV/mil (4 mV/µM) been completed. Group inhibit may be 2 200 mV/mil
b. Impedance: 100K ohm bypassed by jumper.
(single-ended, one-side to 0V) Item 8 Probe Driver Voltage
c. Time Constant Input Filter: Time out clear: 2.25 minutes. Code Description
2.5 seconds 1 -24VDC @ 40 mAC
2 -18 VDC @ 40 mA
Outputs:
a. Meter Output to CSM Display:
VT-2467 Eccentricity Item 9 L. P. Filter
(calibration accuracy 0.25% fullscale Module Ordering Code Description
or ±1 digit). 1 600 rpm cutoff
b. Sensor Signal: (front panel/rear VT-2467—1—2—3,4,5—6—7—8— 2 5000 rpm cutoff
terminals), buffered, 2K ohms
9—10—11—12—13—14—15 Item 10 Start-up Inhibit
c. Relays: one DPDT for ALARM,
one DPDT for TRIP Code Description
Item 1 Module Range Peak to Peak Y Yes
d. Relay Time Delay: Factory set, 1
Code Description N No
second ALARM 3 seconds TRIP
43 0 - 5 mils
e. Analog Outputs (rear terminals): Item 11 Group Trip to CSM
44 0 - 10 mils
Voltage or current ranges (see Code Description
45 0 - 25 mils
Ordering section)—accuracy Y Yes
± 0.25% of span Item 2 Analog Output N No
(rear terminals)
Set Points: Item 12 Group Alarm to CSM
Code Description
a. Two: Alert (Yellow LED) Code Description
01 0 - 1 mA 12 K max.
Danger (Red LED) Y Yes
02 0 - 5 mA 2.4K max.
b. Adjustment: 0-100% of span 20-turn N No
03 0 - 10 mA 1.2 K max.
front accessible potentiometer
04 0 - 20 mA 600 max.
c. Resolution: ±0.1%, ±1 digit Item 13 Reflash to CSM
05 1 - 5 mA 2.4K max.
readout accuracy Code Description
06 4 - 20 mA 600 max.
07 0 - 5 VDC 25 K min. Y Yes
Transfer Performance N No
a. Frequency Response: 45 - 4500 08 0 - 10 VDC 25 K min.
RPM, ±0.2% 0.5 - 450 RPM, ±0.5% 09 1 - 5 VDC 25 K min.
Item 14 Probe OK
b. Deadband: 0.5% standard Code Description
Item 3 Relay Designation
(other values optional) Y Active
Code Description
c. Isolation/Channel Specification: N Disabled
R Alarm and Trip per point
40 dB minimum Crosstalk,
0.5 – 4500RPM; sensor power Item 15 Conformal Coating
Item 4 Relay Sequence
supplies are buffered and limited Code Description
Code Description
to 50 mA CC Required
M Latching manual reset
d. Response Time: 2 cycle update 00 Not Required
A Auto reset on normal
e. Temperature Effect: Span, 0.03% of
reading/°C Zero, 0.03% of span/°C
f. Low Pass Filter: 4-Pole, choice of
600 or 500 RPM cutoff

3.22
SENSORS FOR ALL Proximity (Eddy Current) Mechanical:
CRITICAL VIBRATION Probes a. Input Connection: SMA Coaxial
socket, stainless steel (1/4-36)
PARAMETERS Ametek proximity probes are non-
b. Output and Supply Connections:
contacting displacement transducers
powered by a matching driver (Model 6-32 screw terminal barrier
• Proximity Probes c. Construction: Potted in heavy
1148) and interconnect cable of
specific length. They measure the aluminum base
• Velocity Pickups d. Weight: 230 grams/8.11 ounces
distance between the probe tip and the
machine part being monitored, usually e. Operating Temperature Range:
• Accelerometers -20°C to +70°C.
the shaft. The unique epoxy tip design
of the Ametek probe minimizes the f. Calibration for Cable Length: The
• Complete with Hardware, probe driver is ranged and calibrated
Cabling & Signal Conditioners possibility of probe damage, as well as
protection against corrosive liquids. for total electrical cable length, i.e.:
Total Electrical Cable Length =
Extension cables (for the distance from
Electrical Length of Proximity Probe Cable
the probe driver to the probe) are + Electrical Length of Extension cable
available to 20 feet (or more) with
optional armor shielding. The measur- For the 1113/1114/1115 proximity
able frequency range is from DC to probe “pigtail” cable and the extension
over 600,000 cpm. cable, the electrical and physical cable
lengths are equal.
Probe Model 1113/1114/
1115 Specifications
Input:
a. Probe type: Inductive proximity
1113/1114/1115 Standard Probe Bodies
b. Probe Tip Dia.: 0.25 in /6.35mm
Length Part
c. Supply Voltage: -24VDC nominal
d. Supply Current: 10mA maximum (in inches) Number
at -24VDC 1 1040-134
1.5 1040-135
Output: 2 1040-136
a. Scale Factor: 200mV/mil (DA) 2.5 1040-137
Standard (1 mil=0.001 in/25.4µm) 3 1040-138
b. Impedance: 50 ohms 4 1040-139
6 1040-140
Performance: 8 1040-141
(Figures in brackets for I.S. application 10 1040-142
with zener safety barrier)
a. Gap Range: 3 to 100 mils
(3 to 90 mils).
b. Linear Range: 5 to 95 mils
(5 to 90 mils).
c. Linerarity: ±1 mil from best straight
line from 5 to 100 mils (5 to 90 mils).
e. Static Accuracy: ± 1 mil
f. Dynamic Accuracy: ±5% of
200 mV/mil
g. Frequency Range: DC to 10 kHz
h. Probe Cable Electrical Length:
10 meters maximum.
i. Sensitivity to Interchangeability:
±2 mils static or ± of 200 mV/mil
dynamic
j. Calibration: Slope, offset and bias
field adjustable
k. Calibration Target:
4140 Steel-Standard material

3.23
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring

Proximity Probe Driver


Model 1148 Probe Driver Order/Identification
Code: Example: 1148 – 5 – 250 – 200
Specifications 1148 = Model
5 = Total Electrical Cable Length (meters)
Electrical: 250 = 0.25 inch Diameter Probe Tip
a. Input: 200 = 200mV/mil Output Scaling Factor
1. Probe type: inductive proximity
1113/1114/1115.
2. Probe tip diameter: 0.25 in. / 6.35
mm. Proximity Probes Dimensions
3. Supply Voltage: -24V DC Nominal
4. Supply Current: 10mA Maximum at
JAM NUT
-24V DC. Proximity Model 1113 SUPPLIED WITH
PROBE SMA CONNECTOR
b. Output: Full Thread TIP .312" (7.92) WRENCH FLATS
STAINLESS
STEEL

1. Scale factor: 200 mV/mil (DA) 3 -24 UNC -2A


8
HI-TEMPERATURE COMPLETE
Standard (1 mil = 0.001 in/25,4µm). .250"
TEFLON COAX
CABLE
MODEL
NUMBER
(6.35mm) TAG
2. Impedance: 50 ohms
c. Performance:
1. Gap Range: 3 to 100 mils .215"
(5.46mm)
2" CLEAR
UNSHRUNK
2. Linear Range: 5 to 95 mils FIRST DASH # TUBING .312" (7.92) HEX

3. Linearity: ±1 mil from best straight SECOND DASH #

line from 5 to 100 mils.


4. Static Accuracy: ± 1 mil. Proximity Model 1114
5. Dynamic Accuracy ± 5% of With Relief SMA CONNECTOR
200m V/mil. JAM NUT .312" (7.92) WRENCH FLATS
STAINLESS
STEEL
SUPPLIED WITH
6. Frequency Range: DC to 10 kHz PROBE
TIP 3 -24 UNC -2A
8
HI-TEMPERATURE COMPLETE
7. Probe Cable Electrical Length: .250"
TEFLON COAX
CABLE
MODEL
NUMBER
10 meters maximum. (6.35mm) TAG

8. Sensitivity to Interchangeability: ± 2
mils Static or ± 2% of 200mV/mil .215"
(5.46mm)
SECOND DASH #
2" CLEAR
UNSHRUNK
Dynamic. FIRST DASH # TUBING .312" (7.92) HEX

9. Calibration: Slope and offset and THIRD DASH #

bias field adjustable


10. Calibration Target: 4140 steel –
standard material. Proximity Model 1115 .94" (23.9mm) WIDE THD RELIEF
#60 Ø FOR LOCKING WIRES
Reverse Mount .43" (10.9mm) SMA CONNECTOR
(FOR "A" = .215: STAINLESS STEEL
Mechanical: .31 (7.92mm)

a. Outline dimensions and mounting: 3 -24 UNF-2A


8
HI-TEMPERATURE COMPLETE
as shown .250" .312"
TEFLON COAX
CABLE
MODEL
NUMBER
(7.92mm)
b. Input Connections: SMA coaxial (6.35mm) TAG

socket, stainless steel (1/4 - 36).


c. Output and Supply Connections: "O" RING 2" CLEAR
.215" UNSHRUNK
6 – 32 screw terminal barrier. (5.46mm) TUBING .312" (7.92) HEX
"A" "B"
d. Construction: Potted in heavy .40"
(10.2mm)

aluminum base. "C"


d. Weight: 230 grams/8.11 ounces.
Environmental:
a. Operating Temperature Range: Probe Driver
-20°C to +70°C Model 1148
Calibration For Cable Lengths: The
probe driver is ranged and calibrated for
total electrical cable length, i.e.: –
Total Electrical Cable Length
= Electricial Length of Proximity Probe
Cable + Electrical Length of Extention
Cable.
(For the 1113/1114/1115 Proximity
Probe “Pigtail” Cable and the Extension
Cable, the Electrical and Physical Cable
Lengths are equal).

3.24
Proximity Probe Model Notes: Extension Cable Model
1113/1114/1115 1. Body lengths other than shown can
1331 Ordering
Ordering be supplied (consult factory).
2. Overall lengths other than shown are
available (consult factory). Model 1331 —1—2
Proximity Probe Model 1113 Ordering 3. Cable length is adjusted for electrical
characteristics.
Model 1113 —1—2—3—4 4. Proximity probes use stainless steel Description: SMA-SMA (M-F) for
SMA connectors to conform to proximity probes
API-670.
Item 1 5. Shrink tubing available-polyolefin or Item 1
Probe Length (in inches) teflon — (consult factory) Cable Length (meters)
Standard: 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 4.0, 4.5, 8.0, 8.5 (specify one)
Proximity Probe Model 1115
Item 2 Item 2
Overall Length (in meters) Model 1115 —1—2—3—4—5 Cable: C=Cable
Standard: 0.5, 1.0 A=Armor over cable
Item 1 “A” (in inches) (Specify one)
Item 3 Standard = 0.215, 0.5, 1.125, 1.625, 2.0
Cable Type Note:
L=95 ohms 0.15 (3.8) Dia. Item 2 “B” (in inches) 1. Cable length adjusted for electrical
Standard = 1.0 characteristics.
Item 4
Cable Item 3 “C” (in meters) Example : 1331-4.5-C
C=Cable Standard = 0.5,1.0
A=Armor over cable
AT=Teflon shrink tubing over armor Item 4 Cable Type
(consult factory) L = 95 ohms 0.15 (3.8) dia.
AP=Polyolefin shrink tubing over armor
(consult factory) Item 5 Cable
C=Cable
Notes: A=Armor over cable
1. Body Lengths other than shown can AT=Teflon shrink tubing over armor
be supplied (consult factory). (consult factory)
2. Overall lengths other than shown are AP=Polyolefin shrink tubing over armor
available (consult factory). (consult factory)
3. Cable length is adjusted for electrical
characteristics. Note:
1. SMA connector shipped loose for
Proximity Probe Model 1114 Ordering installation purposes.
2. Body lengths other than shown can
Model 1114 —1—2—3—4—5 be supplied (consult factory).
3. Overall lengths other than shown are
Item 1 Probe Length (in inches) available (consult factory).
Standard: 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 4. Cable length is adjusted for electrical
characteristics.
Item 2 Threaded Length (in inches)
Standard: 1.0–8.5 in 0.5 increments

Item 3 Overall Length (in meters)


Standard: 0.5, 1.0

Item 4 Cable Type


L=95 ohms 0.15 (3.8) dia.

Item 5 Cable
C=Cable
A=Armor over cable
AT=Teflon shrink tubing over armor
(consult factory)
AP=Polyolefin shrink tubing over armor
(consult factory)

3.25
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Velocity Pickups Velocity Pickups Dimensions
Ametek velocity pickups are self-
generating devices that measure
“seismic” motion, usually at the bearing B
housing. They are rugged units with Velocity Pickup Model 1716 A

high noise immunity and long signal C

transmission capability. Their low


impedance AC output signal is
proportional to vibration velocity, CONNECTOR MS3102A-10SL-3P
PIN: A–COIL + 1/4–28 UNF x .31
VERTICAL
making them ideal for many applica- B–CASE (SHIELD)
C–COIL –

tions. Both low and high temperature, 0°

as well as low frequency axis sensitive


90° 90° HORIZONTAL
models are available.
180°

3.50" 1.50"
Velocity Pickups ORIENTATION (88.9mm) (38.1mm)

Specifications 4.15"
(105.4mm)
1.62"
(41.1mm)

Velocity Pickup Model 1716/1718 6.25"


(159.0mm)
MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH
WITH 1338 CABLE
Frequency: 900 to 60000 RPM (-3db)

Output:
7.7mV/mm/sec±5% at 6000 RPM
195mV/in/sec±5% at 6000 RPM

Impedance: 88Ω Velocity Pickup Model 1718 CLEAR


SHIELD

BLACK

Displacement: ≥2.5 mm/0.1 in. INTEGRAL CABLE


2-CONDUCTOR, SHIELDED
#20AWG
2" CLEAR UNSHRUNK
Weight: 397 gms/ 140 oz. VERTICAL TUBING
CLEAR - COIL +
BLK - COIL –
SHLD - N/C
1/4–28 UNF x .31

COMPLETE MODEL
0° NUMBER TAG

Temperature: 130°C/266°F (1716) 90° 90° HORIZONTAL


BLK

204°C/400°F (1716T) SHLD

180°

Orientation: All Axis ORIENTATION .90" .60"


1.50"
(38.1mm)
(22.9mm) (15.2mm)
x 3.50" 1.62"
(88.9mm) (41.1mm)
Material: Aluminum
4.75"
(120.0mm)

Velocity Pickup Model 1719H/1720/ MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH

1721H/1722V

Frequency: 270 to 60000 RPM (-3db)

Output: B

7.7mV/mm/sec±5% at 6000 RPM Velocity Pickup Model 1719H A

C
195mV/in/sec±5% at 6000 RPM
Impedance: 88Ω
CONNECTOR MS3102A-10SL-3P
Displacement: ≥2.5mm/.1 in. VERTICAL PIN: A–COIL +
B–CASE (SHIELD)
1/4–28 UNF x .31

C–COIL –

Weight: 397 gms/14 oz. 0°

Temperature: 130°C/266°F 90° 90° HORIZONTAL

Orientation: All axis 180°

Material: Aluminum ORIENTATION


3.50"
(88.9mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm)

4.15" 1.62"
(105.4mm) (41.1mm)

6.25"
(159.0mm)
MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH
WITH 1338 CABLE

3.26
Velocity Pickups
Velocity Pickup Model 1720V
B
A
Ordering
C Velocity Pickup Model 1716
Model 1716 – (T)
Temperature Range
CONNECTOR MS3102A-10SL-3P
PIN: A–COIL + 1/4–28 UNF x .31
VERTICAL
B–CASE (SHIELD)
C–COIL –
Velocity Pickup Model 1718

Model 1718 —1—2


90° 90° HORIZONTAL

180°
Item 1 Cable Length
ORIENTATION
3.50"
(88.9mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm)
3M=3 meters
4.15" 1.62"
10F=10 feet
(105.4mm) (41.1mm)
Other Lengths optional
6.25"
(159.0mm)
MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH
WITH 1338 CABLE
Item 2 Cable
C=Cable
A=Armor cable
(limit 25 ft./7.5 meters)

Velocity Pickup Model 1719H


Model 1719H
Velocity Pickup Model 1721H
SHIELD
CLEAR Velocity Pickup Model 1720V
BLACK
Model 1720V
INTEGRAL CABLE
Note: 1. Mates with 1388 cable.
2-CONDUCTOR, SHIELDED
#20AWG
2" CLEAR UNSHRUNK CLEAR - COIL + 1/4–28 UNF x .31
VERTICAL TUBING BLK - COIL –
SHLD - N/C Unit Axis Description
COMPLETE MODEL
0° NUMBER TAG 1716 Horz/Vert Top Connector,
90° 90° HORIZONTAL
BLK
195 mV/in/sec,
SHLD
15-1000 Hz, 260°F
180°
(130°C) limit
ORIENTATION .90" .60"
(22.9mm) (15.2mm)
1.50"
(38.1mm) 1718 Horz/Vert Same as 1716
x 3.50"
(88.9mm)
1.62"
(41.1mm)
except with
4.75"
integral cable,
(120.0mm)

MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH


no connector
1719H Horz Top Connector,
195 mV/in/sec,
5-1000 Hz, 260°F
(130°C) limit
1720V Vert Top Connector,
195mV/in/sec,
Velocity Pickup Model 1722V 5-1000 Hz, 260°F
CLEAR
SHIELD (130°C) limit
BLACK 1721H Horz Same as 1719H
except with
INTEGRAL CABLE
2-CONDUCTOR, SHIELDED
#20AWG
integral cable,
VERTICAL
2" CLEAR UNSHRUNK
TUBING
CLEAR - COIL +
BLK - COIL –
1/4–28 UNF x .31 no connector
SHLD - N/C

COMPLETE MODEL
NUMBER TAG
1722V Vert Same as 1720V
BLK
except with
90° 90° HORIZONTAL
SHLD integral cable,
180° no connector
1.50"
ORIENTATION .90" .60"

x
(22.9mm) (15.2mm)
3.50"
(38.1mm)

1.62"
Velocity Pickup
(88.9mm) (41.1mm)

4.75"
Cables Ordering
(120.0mm)

MINIMUM 90° BEND LENGTH


Unit Description
1338 Use with 1716, 1719H, 1720V
Specify length in feet.
Example: 1338-50F

3.27
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Accelerometers Accelerometer Model 2076 Accelerometer Model 2079
Accelerometers are seismic motion Electrical: Electrical:
sensors with an output proportional to a. Sensitivity: 100 mv/g ±5% a. Charge Sens: 25pc/g
acceleration. Ametek offers low, b. Frequency Response: b. Frequency Response: 5Hz-
medium, and high frequency models to 5 Hz to 10 kHz ±5% 5kHz±5%
meet most industry requirements and c. Equivalent Noise: 001g c. Temperature: -50°C to 260°C
standards. All are rugged and transmit d. Power: Constant current 4mA -58°F to 436°F
a high output, noise-free signal over Compliance voltage 24V d. Transverse Sens: <5%
long distances. e. Output: Impedance <100 Ω e. Case: Isolated
Two types of accelerometers exist: f. Transverse Sens: <5% Mechanical:
“charge” units for operation above g. Temperature: -40°C to 121°C a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF
250˚F, using a charge amplifier or -40°F to 250°F b. Weight: 85gms/3 oz.
impedance cable; “low impedance” h. Case: Isolated c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 304
units with integrated electronics for Mechanical: d. Case: Hermetically Sealed
operation below 250˚F, free from any a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A
cable length considerations. b. Weight: 85 gms/3.0 oz. Velocity Sensor Model 2083
c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 304 Electrical:
d. Case: Hermetically Sealed a. Sensitivity: 100mV/in/sec±5%
Accelerometer Max Velocity: 50 in/sec
Specifications Accelerometer Model 2077 b. Frequency Response:
Accelerometer Model 2073 Electrical: 4.0 Hz to 2.0 kHz±5%
Electrical: a. Sensitivity: 100mV/g ±5% at 100 Hz c. Equivalent Noise: 0.005 in/sec
a. Sensitivity: 100mV/g ±5% b. Frequency Response: 5 Hz to d. Power: Constant Current 4mA
b. Frequency Response: 1000 Hz ±5% Compliance Voltage 24V
3 Hz to 10 kHz±5% c. Equivalent Noise: 0.001g e. Output Impedance: < 100 Ω
c. Equivalent Noise: 0.0005g d. Power: Constant Current 4mA f. Transverse Sen: < 5%
d. Power: Constant current - 4mA (Bias 11 +4/-6VDC) g. Temperature: -50°C to 121°C
Compliance voltage - 24V Compliance Voltage 24V -58°F to 250°F
e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω h. Sens Change: -10% to +10%
f. Transverse Sensitivity: <5% f. Transverse Sens: <7% i. Case: Isolated
g. Temperature: -40°C to 121°C g. Temperature: -58°C to 121°C Mechanical:
-40°F to 250°F -50°F to 250°F a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A
h. Case: Signal isolated h. Case: Signal Isolated b. Weight: 133 gms/4.7 oz.
Mechanical: Mechanical:
a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A a. Mounting Stud: 1/2 NPT Velocity Sensor Model 2085
b. Weight: 80 gms/2.8 oz. b. Weight: 420 gms/15 oz. Electrical:
c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 303 c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 303 a. Sensitivity: 100mv/in./sec±5%
d. Case: Hermetically sealed d. Case: Hermetically sealed Max velocity 50 in./SEC
e. Terminals: Epoxy Sealed b. Frequency Response:
Accelerometer Model 2075 f. Type: Compression 4.0 Hz to 2.0 KHz ± 5%
Electrical: g. Max Wire: 14 AWG. c. Equivalent Noise: 0.0005 in./SEC
a. Sensitivity: 100 mV/g ±5% d. Power: Constant Current 4mA
b. Frequency Response: 3 Hz to (Bias12±2VDC) Compliance
10 kHz±5% Voltage 24V
c. Equivalent Noise: 0.0005g e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω
d. Power: Constant Current f. Transverse Sens: <5%
4mA (Bias12±2VDC), Compliance g. Temperature: -50°C to 121°C
Voltage 24V -58°F to 250°F
e. Output Impedance: <100 Ω h. Sens Change: -10% to ±10%
f. Transverse Sensitivity: <5% i. Case Signal: Isolated
g. Temperature: -40°C to 121°C Mechanical:
-40°F to 250°F a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A
h. Case: Signal isolated b. Weight: 133gms/4.7 oz without
Mechanical: cable
a. Mounting Stud: 1/4-28 UNF-2A c. Material: Stainless Steel 303
b. Weight: 80gms/2.8 oz. (consult factory-316 stainless steel)
(without cable) d. Cable: Type Belden 8402. Environ-
c. Material: Stainless Steel Type 303 mentally sealed for splash resis-
d. Cable: Type Belden 8402. Environ- tance. Length (7.6 meters) 25 feet,
mentally-sealed for splash resis- Conductors 20AWG.
tance. Length (7.6 meters) 25 feet
Conductors 20 AWG.

3.28
Charge Amplifier Accelerometers Dimensions
Model 2144
Specifications Accelerometer Model 2073
Electrical:
a. Input: Signal source accelerometer 4.50" MIN.
(114mm) N/C A CASE (NOTE 1)
piezoelectric CABLE BEND CLEARANCE
.175"
(4.44mm)
.875"
(22.2mm)
C (+)SIGNAL
B (–)COMMON
b. Charge Sensitivity: 25pc/g standard
16 to 1600 pc/g available
c. Supply Voltage: up to -32 Volts DC C A
.875"
(22.2mm)
d. Supply Current: 15 mA (typical) B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
at -24VDC (REMOVABLE SET SCREW)
.25"
(6.4mm)

Output: 2.12"
(53.8mm)
a. Scale Factor: 100 mv/g (50,10 mV/g
available)
b. Impedance: 50 ohms
c. Voltage Swing: Maximum peak-to- Accelerometer Model 2075
peak range in 2 Volts less than
supply voltage
d. Bias: -12V±VDC 2.75" MIN.
SHIELD
(69.85mm)
CABLE BEND CLEARANCE WHITE (+)SIGNAL
.175" .875"
Performance: (4.44mm) (22.2mm)
BLACK
(–)COMMON
a. Frequency Response: 2% Down
at 6Hz, upper frequency set .875"
by accelerometer (22.2mm)

b. Noise: 25 UV RMS RT1 (Typical) .263" OD


(6.68mm)
1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
(REMOVABLE SET SCREW)
c. Calibration: Field adjustable .25"
(6.4mm)

2.12"
Mechanical: (53.8mm)

a. Input Connection: coaxial 1/4-36,


stainless steel
b. Output and Supply Connections:
Barrier, 3 screw terminals 6-32 Accelerometer Model 2076
c. Construction: Potted in heavy
aluminum case, stainless steel
4.75" MIN.
case available (120mm) C OPEN
CABLE BEND CLEARANCE
d. Environmental Operation Tempera- .25"
(6.35mm)
.875"
(22.2mm)
A (+)SIGNAL
B (–)COMMON
ture Range: -34°C to + 85°C
e. Storage Temperature Range:
-55° C 60 +125°C C A
.875"
(22.2mm)

B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP


(REMOVABLE SET SCREW)

Charge Amplifier Model .30"


(7.6mm)

2144 Ordering 2.04"


(51.8mm)

Model Description
2144-25-100 Charge amplifier:
API-678 format, for
use with charge Accelerometer Model 2077
accelerometer
(eg. Model 2079) ≈ 6.25"
(158.7mm) 2 (+) SIGNAL
(ASSEMBLED)
≈ 3.25" 1 (–) COMMON
(82.5mm)

4.95"
(125.73mm)

PIN 2
PIN 1

3/4 NPT 1.25" HEX 1/2 NPT


(31.7mm)

(5
2. 1m
7.
25 m
" )

OPTION –01
(ACCESS ELBOW)
(3/4 NPT - 3/4 NPT)

3.29
AMETEK
Machine Monitoring
Accelerometers Ordering
Model
Accelerometer Model 2079 2073
Note: 1. Serial numbers prior to 308
have pin A connected to case.
C
.25" .875" B
(6.35mm) (22.2mm) A
Model
2075
C A
.875"
(22.2mm) 2076
B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
2077
.30"
(REMOVABLE SET SCREW)
2079
(7.6mm) 2083
2.04"
(51.8mm)
2085

Accelerometer Cables
Model Description
1332 Use w/2073, 2083
Velocity Sensor Model 2083
1333 Use w/2076
N/C A
1334 Use w/2079 LoTemp
C (+)SIGNAL
1336 Use w/2079 HiTemp
B (–)COMMON
4.68" MIN.
(118mm)
CABLE BEND CLEARANCE
.875"
.175"
(4.44mm)
Specify cable length in feet with
(22.2mm) ACROSS FLATS model number.
Example: 1332-50F
C A
1.00" DIA.
(25.4mm)
50 ft. cable for 2073/2083
B 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
(REMOVABLE SET SCREW)

2.30"
(58.4mm) Mounting Hardware
A wide range of accessories exist for
mounting Ametek probes. Depending
on whether the probe is a contacting or
Velocity Sensor Model 2085 non-contacting type, it can be mounted
directly on the equipment by means of
an angle bracket. Ametek mounting
3.5" MIN.
(89.0mm)
SHIELD hardware makes probe installation easy
CABLE BEND CLEARANCE
.175" WHITE (+)SIGNAL and in-place probe adjustments
.875" (4.44mm)
(22.2mm) ACROSS FLATS
BLACK
(–)COMMON possible. Contact the Ametek factory
for assistance in choosing the suitable
A
1.00" DIA.
(25.4mm)
hardware for your application.
.263" OD 1/4–28 UNF-2B x .18 DP
(6.68mm) (REMOVABLE SET SCREW)

2.30"
(58.4mm)

Charge Amplifier Model 2144


.17"
(43.0mm)4 HOLES
2.50" #6-32 UNC.
(63.5mm) BARRIER SCREW, TYP.

2.00"
(50.8mm)

CALIBRATION
CONTROL
–V COM OUT 1.88"
(47.8mm)

2.50"
(63.5mm)
SERIAL NO.
1.25" IDENTIFICATION
2.12" (31.8mm) TAG
(53.8mm) INPUT PC/G

MODEL 2144 OUTPUT mV/G


CHARGE
ACCELEROMETER AMPLIFIER

MINIATURE STAINLESS
STEEL COAX CONNECTOR

3.30
AMETEK
Recorders
Ametek provides event • Sequential Events
and waveform recording Recorders
for power generation, The ISM-1 is fully user-configurable
transmission and to record contact sequences for 1
to 6656 points with 1 millisecond
distribution system resolution. A wide variety of input
analysis. These recorders termination and output options
are widely used in power allow easy application to most
processes and electric utility plants
utilities, from large and substations.
investor-owned business
to small co-generators, • Digital Transient
rural electric Recorders
cooperatives, and The TR-100, TR-2000 and new
industrial electrical P&QR Series are the most cost
systems. effective products of their kind.

Bulk consumers of electric power,


• Portable Units
manufacturing plants, power substa- Available as a DL-8000 (TR-100),
tions, and process equipment users DL-9000 (TR-2000) and P&QR-P.
also can monitor critical operations for
rapid diagnosis and restoration of
service.

Ametek’s recorders also provide


logging and recording of steady-state
values to aid in understanding of load
conditions, with fault detection and
long term monitoring capability.

All Ametek Transient Recorder prod-


ucts provide for data transmission to
PC computers, which allows complete
analysis using Ametek's Windows™-
based packages.

4.1
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders

The Ametek Integrated


System Monitor, ISM-1,
is a modular contact
sequence of events
recorder system offering
the flexibility and
reliability to tackle any
application from several
to several thousand
points with confidence.
• Reliable

• Versatile

• High MTBF

• Optional Modbus Interface

• Optional RiSCue Alarm


Management Software

Reliability was the number one criteria


in the design of the ISM-1. Every
component, every connector, and
every piece of hardware was selected
with the goal of achieving reliability
orders of magnitude higher than any
other events recorder.

Virtually all operating parameters are


programmable in the ISM-1, to tailor
the alarming and reporting to the needs
of different applications. Interfaces to
printers, DCS systems, CRT
annunciator, and PC computers
provide the necessary data for prompt
response or analysis. A variety of input
filtering options reduces false reports
from sensitive or noise-generating
equipment.

The ISM-1 is the only sequence of


events recorder designed to last as
long as the facility in which it is installed
— with minimal service or
maintenance!

4.2
Event Capture Unit Communications Field Contact Voltage
The Event Capture Unit or ECU is the Interface Unit Power Supply
heart of the ISM-1 System. Each ECU The Communications Interface Unit The Field Contact Voltage (FCV) power
supplies the logic required to monitor (CIU) interfaces with single or multiple supply provides wetting voltage for dry
either 128 or 256 inputs and can ECUs as well as CIUs to provide a contact inputs and performs input
function as a stand alone events more advanced recording system. check and ground detection functions.
recorder. Each input is sampled every Each CIU constantly runs a self
millisecond and can be configured for
normally open or normally closed
diagnostic routine and provides error FCV Specifications
messages with clear visual indication of Inputs: 256 or 512 contact inputs per
contacts. system status. supply
The design of the ECU virtually
eliminates the nuisance of false alarms. Wetting Voltage: 24, 48, 125, or
Digital filters are available on a system 250 VDC.
wide and per input channel basis. The
ECU can be configured to automati-
cally delete noisy points from scan and
reinsert them at a later time. Each CIU performs the following
general functions:
• Communicates with, and time sorts
data from, multiple ECUs in the
system
Configurations Available:
• Acts as a smart interface to a variety (1) Single 256 point supply
of Inputs/Outputs. (2) Dual 512 point supply
ECU Specifications – 4 User programmable function (3) Redundant 256 point supply
Inputs: 32-256 contacts per ECU contact inputs (4) Two different FCV voltages, 256
N.O./N.C. per input – 2 User programmable relay points each
outputs
Power: Redundant 20-60 or 90-260
VDC and/or 120/240 VAC 50/60Hz • Selection of up to 14 of the following:
– SCM fiber optic module for
Outputs: (2) RS-232 ports for local interfacing with remote ECU up
terminal I/O and printer, (1) Fiber Optic to 500 meters away (up to 1000
port for interface to CIU. Specify meters optional)
distances up to 1000 meters between – RDM relay driver module provides
ECU and CIU. four additional software driven
relay outputs
MTBF: 115 years – Dual RS-232 module provides
redundant and/or primary and
Legends: 119 characters per input; backup output ports for termi-
divisible in any combination of alarm nals, printers, and other RS-232
and return-to-normal descriptor compatible devices including
Modbus and other DCS
Event Memory: Minimum of 1000 protocols
events per ECU in system. – Parallel Output Port provides
interface for high speed parallel
printers
ISM-SX – Fiber Optic Port provides a high
By addition of Input Isolation Modules, speed data output for interfacing
FCV power supply, and user input/ with other CIUs in very large
output devices, a complete recording systems
system is created for up to 256 points. – IBM Interface provides an error
This is available as the ISM-SX. corrected binary interface for
high speed, reliable remote or
local communication to an IBM
or compatible PC

• Power: Same as ECU

4.3
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
A wide selection of Input Assemblies to meet any application
Input Options
Compact, simple and advanced to save Height Width Depth Maximum Terminations
installation/retrofit costs. These simple Behind Panel Number
termination options offer the widest (Not Including Of Inputs
alternatives and simplify installation to save Wiring)
time and costs. The standard input module,
used in all of these options, includes optical Input Terminal 7.0" 19.0" 22.0" 128 compression
isolators, initial input conditioning and input Shelf (ITS) terminal blocks
check circuitry.
High Density 27.75" 19.0” 8.4" 512 compression
Input Card terminal blocks
Rack or interface to
existing RiS
AN-4100/RA-3800
Input Panels
(AN-4190)
DC Input 19.25" 19.0" 0.0" 64 compression
Terminal terminal blocks
Panel (ITP-C)
DC Input 19.25" 19.0" 0.0" 32 uses GE or States
Terminal terminal blocks
Panel (ITP-TB)
Fully Isolated 24.46” 19” 0.0” 32 2 terminals
ITP per input,
AC/DC uses GE or
States blocks

Applications All modules isolated input to output; AC/DC to isolated input-to-input.


ISM-SX Block Diagram Standard Systems
(Up to 256 points) (Up to 3328 points)OUTPUT DEVICES – PRINTERS
– MASTER STATION
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) – TERMINALS
– DCS
KEYBOARD/ RS-232 RS-232
TERMINAL
PRINTER CIU

FIBER OPTIC

PRIME FCV SUPPLY UP TO


POWER ECU 13 FCV
(OPTIONAL) ECU ECU (PER ECU)
RIBBON
RIBBON (OPTIONAL)

UP TO 8 INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE


MODULES INPUT MODULE
(8 PER ECU)

FIELD INPUTS
(32-256 INPUTS) FIELD INPUTS
(32-3328 INPUTS)

OUTPUT DEVICES
Large Distributed
ISM-1 System
(Up to 6656 points) MASTER FIBER OPTIC
CIU

SUB- SUB-
CIU CIU

FCV
(PER ECU) ECU ECU ECU ECU

INPUT MODULES
(8 PER ECU) UP TO 13

4.4
ISMCOMM Software ISM System Clock Accuracy: 100 milliseconds per
day typical with software correction,
Specifications 100 milliseconds per day with TCXO
• Automatic Retrieval of Data Inputs: 1 — 6656 inputs option over entire temperature range; ±
1 millisecond with IRIG-B (CIU only).
• “Multi-Site Analyzer’’ Input Resolution: 1 millisecond
system wide, regardless of number of Logic Power: 20-60 or 90-260 VDC
The ISMCOMM software is a inputs and 120/240 VAC 50/60 HZ 10 watts
program used to automatically or maximum per ECU or CIU.
manually retrieve data recorded by Isolation: Via optical couplers to
the ISM-1 to a computer via an RS- provide isolation from input to output Operating Temperature Range:
232 link and selected modems. and power. An optional isolated 32° to 140°F (0 to 60°C)
module provides isolation from input-
Once the data is stored at the com- to-input and accepts AC inputs. Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing
puter, files can be merged, a time
window can be extracted, selected Input Normal State: Normally open Surge Withstand Capacity (SWC):
points can be extracted and any (NO) or normally closed (NC) can be set Conforms to IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1-
information can be printed out in true on a per point or group basis via 1989
sequential order. Even data from printer/keyboard or remote computer.
different recorders! RFI: Tested per SAMA standards to
Field Contact Voltage (FCV): PMC 33.1c-1978 class 2, band A, B
Requirements: IBM-PC/XT or Wet or dry contacts 24, 48, 125, and C
compatible with 640K RAM, DOS 3.1 250 VDC, Ametek or customer
or later, monitor, hard disk drive, printer supplied, or 24, 48, 120, 240 VAC Dielectric Strength: Conforms to
and serial port. customer supplied. Negative FVC is IEEE C37.90-1978, 1500 VDC input to
also available. ground
CIU Time Synchronization: IRIG-B, Output Format: ASCII serial text in the
AC-line, pulse per unit time selectable following order: point status, point
by the user, with crystal clock backup. number, date and time, legend

CRT Annunciator:
Typical Computer Screen for ISMCOMM A CRT color annunciator option
provides control room operators with
dynamic alarm displays as they
Event File: C:\RIS\ISM-1\DATA.EVT Total Events = 27 happen. The display can be pro-
Event Type Point Time Date Station grammed for alarm grouping, color
coding, and several types of se-
18 A - 00005 at 16:34:04.348 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station quences. A custom control keyboard
Loss of Station Service provides direct access to current
19 A - 00001 at 16:34:05.771 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station alarms and recent status changes.
Loss of DC/Breaker Control
Modbus:
20 A - 00002 at 16:34:05.794 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station Using a dual serial port, the ISM can
Hot Oil output all recorded data on request to
21 A - 00004 at 16:34:07.662 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station a Modbus master. This is also used to
Hot Spot interface the ISM-1 to our RiSCue
22 A - 00003 at 16:34:07.890 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station Alarm Management Software.
LTC Backup Alarm
23 N - 00002 at 16:34:08.312 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station
Oil Temp. OK
24 N - 00001 at 16:34:08.337 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station
DC on Line
25 N - 00005 at 16:34:09.607 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station
Service OK
26 N - 00004 at 16:34:09.926 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station
Hot Spot OK
27 N - 00003 at 16:34:10.921 on 07/31/91 from Northside Station
LTC Normal

F1 - Display Help Screen ESC - Quit Legend Offset = 0

4.5
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
ECU Dimension &
Connections

Event Capture Unit (ECU)

EVENT CAPTURE UNIT (ECU)

J5 J6 J7 J8 J9
1.718"
(43.64mm) J20
J13 J14
J1 J2 J3 J4

0.856"
(21.82mm)

REAR VIEW
(ROTATED 180° FOR CLARITY)

22.00"
(558.8mm)

11.75"
(298.45mm)

1.87"
(47.50mm)

FRONT VIEW

1.718" 1.25"
(43.64mm) (31.75mm)

18.34"
(465.84mm)

19.00"
(482.60mm)

4.6
CIU Dimensions &
Connections

Communication Interface Unit (CIU)

COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE UNIT (CIU)

3.234" FRONT/REAR
(82.14mm) SLIDE MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS ARE
THE SAME
2.014"
(51.16mm)
J15 J0
1.454" J20
(36.93mm) J14 J13 J12 J11 J10 J9 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1

0.234" REAR VIEW


(5.94mm) RETAINER CARD, BOARD,
(ROTATED 180° FOR CLARITY) AND CONNECTOR ARE
SHOWN FOR REF. ONLY

22.00"
(558.8mm)

15.05"
(382.52mm)

1.87"
(47.50mm)

FRONT VIEW

3.47" 3.00"
(88.08mm) (76.20mm)

18.34"
(465.84mm)
19.00"
(482.60mm)

4.7
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
FCV Dimensions &
Connections

Field Contact Voltage (FCV) Power Supply

FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE (FCV) POWER SUPPLY

3.47" OUTPUT POWER OUTPUT POWER


(88.08mm)
3.234" 3.31"
(82.14mm) (84.07mm)
SUPPLY B SUPPLY A

REAR VIEW
(ROTATED 180° FOR CLARITY)

22.00"
(558.8mm)

15.05"
(382.52mm)

1.87"
(47.50mm)

FRONT VIEW

FIELD CONTACT VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ISM–1


FCV
POWER
3.47" SUPPLY
(88.08mm)

3.00" SUPPLY A GROUND FAULT SUPPLY B


(76.20mm) OUTPUT PRIME FUSE NEGATIVE POSITIVE OUTPUT PRIME FUSE
ON POWER POWER 1 2 ON POWER POWER 1 2
ADJ ADJ
1 2 FAULT FAULT 1 2

OFF OFF

18.34"
(465.84mm)
19.00"
(482.60mm)

4.8
Input Module Dimensions
17.00 (431.8) .50
(12.7)

.50
OUTPUT (12.7)
CONN.

POWER 8.36
CONN. (212.34)

INPUT MOD. & CARRIER


CARD ASSEMBLY
19.00 (482.6)
RIBBON CABLE GUIDES
FOR OUTPUT CONNECTOR
CABLE TIE PLATE
FOR OUTPUT CABLE

DISCRETE WIRE GUIDES 19.218


FOR PWR. CONN. (488.1)

18.25
(412.7)

5.25 27.82
(133.4) (701.55)
INPUT
TERM. 11.00
BLOCKS 20.97 (279.4)
(532.64)
7.50
(190.5)
5.25
INPUT
(133.5)
TERM.
BLOCKS

5.25
(133.4)
1.48 (37.6)
.125 1.48
(3.18) (37.59)
TYP.
3.48
(88.39) .42 TYP
(10.67)
DISCRETE WIRE GUIDES 19.00 (482.6)
FOR INPUT TERM. BLOCKS
RIBBON CABLE GUIDES DIMENSIONS: IN
FOR INPUT TERM BLOCKS (MM) DIMENSIONS: IN
.42 18.16 (461.26) (MM)
(10.67)

High Density Input Module Chassis Typical Input Termination Panel

18.25"
0.0
0.374
(9.50)

FRONT VIEW CUSTOMER WIRING - TERMINATED


TO MODULE MOUNTED COMPRESSION
19.00" TYPE TERMINAL BLOCKS, WITH REMOVABLE PLUGS WHICH HANDLE 19.00"
UP TO A 12 AWG WIRE WITHOUT A FERRULE

18.625
(473.07
19.0
(482.6)
6.969"

(SIDE VIEW)

6.969"

0.86
Input Terminal Shelf (21.84)
0.0
SIDE VIEW

4.9
AMETEK
Event
Recorders
Recorders
ISM-1 Integrated System
Monitor Ordering
ISM –1 1 — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — 7 — 8 — 9 — 10

Item 1. System Wired Capacity — XG Non-redundant 24 VDC D Other


Total # of wired points (1-6656) Item 8. Input Terminations — Divide Item 10. Options
the number of wired points by 32 or 64, L Cabinet Mounting — 27"W x
Item 2. System Active Capacity — depending on the type of terminations 31"D x 90"H NEMA 1 Cabinet
Number of active points, in multiples required. Replace the X in the model J Portable keyboard
of 32. number with the quantity required. All *T TCXO 1 ppm high accuracy
Input Modules provide optical isolation clock
Item 3. Prime Input Power source with a common return. Isolated Input *DH Dual RS232 Port
A 125 VDC Modules provide an isolated return per *PO Parallel Port
B 48 VDC point. Input Terminal Shelves (ITS) are *FO Fiber Optic Output Port
C 120/240 VAC provided with chassis slides and are *RD Relay Driver Module
D 250 VDC designed for 19" rack mounting. for CIU
E 24 VDC *CI/XXX Computer Interface—Specify
Input Termination Panel (ITP) IBM-PC, Bailey, Fox 1A, Fox
Item 4. Communication Interface XA Lo density States Sliding Links (32) 300, Modbus
Unit (CIU) — required for Smart Interface XB Lo density EB-25 (32) +M IBM-PC compatible Master
or if multiple ECUs are utilized. XC Lo density CR-151 (32) Station Software (ISMCOMM)
0 Not required XD High density Phoenix *K1 Color CRT Annunciator with
1 One required compression (64) Control keyboard
XN High density compression (32)
Item 5. Event Capture Unit (ECU) — XE Lo density isolated States *Requires a CIU
128 point unit. Divide the # of active +One time fee per customer
Sliding Link (32)
points by 128 to determine the # of XF Lo density isolated EB-25 (32)
ECUs required. Replace the X in the XG Lo density isolated CR151 (32)
model number with the quantity required. XH High density isolated Phoenix
XS Short range compression (64)
(20 meters maximum)
XL Long range Input Termination Shelf (ITS)
(500 meters maximum) XI High density Phoenix
0 None required compression (32)
(Use 256 Point) XJ High density Phoenix
compression (64)
Item 6. Event Capture Unit (ECU) — XK High density Phoenix
256 point unit. Divide the # of active compression (96)
points by 256 to determine the # of XL High density Phoenix
ECUs required. Replace the X in the compression (128)
model number with the quantity required.
0 None required (use 128 point) Input Rack
XS Short range XR Input Card Rack — Capacity of
(20 meters maximum) 8 modules not included (256
XL Long range points)
(500 meters maximum) XRD Input Modules — 32 points
XRA Isolated Input Modules — 32
Item 7. Field ContactVoltage (FCV) points
— The # of FCV units typically equals
the number of ECU’s. Replace the X in Item 9. Printer type
the model number with the quantity A None required
required. Specify positive or negative. B 40 column Red/Black printer
XA Customer supplied mounted on a 19" shelf suitable
(requires Input Check Module for rack mounting.
— Specify Voltage) C 40 column Red/Black printer
XB Redundant 125 VDC and keyboard mounted on a 19"
XC Redundant 48 VDC shelf suitable for rack mounting.
XD Redundant 24 VDC
XE Non-redundant 125 VDC
XF Non-redundant 48 VDC

4.10
ISM-SX Stand Alone
ECU System Ordering
ISM –SX 1 — 2— 3 — 4 — 5 — 6

Item 1. System Wired Capacity Item 6. Options


128 128 Point Event Capture Unit Item 5. Input Terminations B Shelf Mounted Printer
256 Point Event Capture Unit The terminal blocks and input module (with shelf)
are mounted on an Input Termination C Printer/Keyboard and Shelf
Panel (ITP). Replace the X in the model
Item 2. System Active Capacity # with the quantity required. Input J Portable Keyboard
Specify the number of active points Terminal Shelves (ITS) are provided Extra Manual
in multiples of 32. with chassis slides and are designed
for 19" rack mounting. A standard 10
Item 3. Input Power ft. ribbon cable is provided to connect
A 125 VDC the input termination panel(s) to the
B 48 VDC ECU.
C 120/240 VAC
D 250 VDC XA States sliding links ITP (32 inputs)
E 24 VDC XB EB-25 ITP (32 inputs)
XC CR-151 ITP (32 inputs)
Item 4. Field Contact Voltage XD Compression ITP (64 inputs)
(Specify positive or negative.) XN Compression ITP (32 inputs)
A Customer Supplied — Specify XE Isolated States ITP (32 inputs)
voltage XF Isolated EB-25 ITP (32 inputs)
B Redundant 125 VDC XG Isolated CR-151 ITP (32 inputs)
C Redundant 48 VDC XH Isolated Compression ITP
D Redundant 24 VDC (64 inputs)
E 125 VDC Non-redundant XI Compression ITS (32 inputs)
F 48 VDC Non-redundant non-isolated
G 24 VDC Non-redundant XJ Compression ITS (64 inputs)
non-isolated
XK Compression ITS (96 inputs)
non-isolated
XL Compression ITS (128 inputs)
non-isolated
XR 256 pt. Input Card Rack
(Rack only)
XRD Input Cards (32 inputs — for
Card Rack)
XRA Isolated Input Card (32 inputs)
Others available Consult Factory

Note: All inputs are optically isolated


from input-to-output. The isolated input
options also provide input-to-input
isolation.

4.11
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders

TR2000 Series
Multi-Function
Recorders
Be prepared in today’s increasingly
competitive and dynamic industry. The
Multi-Function Recorder (TR2000) series
was designed to be at the leading edge
of technology. These recorders represent
the next generation of utility analysis
monitoring. A farsighted product, which
uses the most advanced technology
available, yet remains fully compatible
with the successful TR-100 and DL-8000
series recorders. models, allowing the customer to
choose that which best meets techni-
Today’s customers expect superior cal requirements and budgetary
solutions for their needs. Concerned constraints. Applications for use
with obtaining optimal power flow via The TR2000 has a wide variety of
the network, while still retaining control The TR2000 is a dynamic monitoring functions; and is particularly suitable for
and reliability, they are demanding not system, producing information in an use in all of the following applications:
only increased, but integrated function- accessible format to enable direct action • Generation
ality to be provided in a cost effective to be taken, sometimes even before a • Transmission
product. Such a product aids asset potential problem becomes a reality. • Distribution
management and planning, while Communication with the recorder can be • Laboratories
remaining fully flexible and compatible both local and remote allowing for • Thyristor stack monitoring
with existing systems and producing flexibility of response and the ability to • Flexible ac transmission
real time answers. The total package is obtain real time information. system (FACTS) monitoring
not complete without the superior, • Static VAr compensators
reliable support and after sales service, A major benefit of the TR2000 is that it monitoring
which one can expect from Ametek. aids real time monitoring of a power • Geomagnetically induced
system. This could enable the in- currents (GIC)
Such solutions can only be met by creased loading of transmission lines, • DC links
listening to the customer and utilizing so a greater amount of control could • Lightning studies
advanced technology in a variety of be obtained over the transmission • General power system research
unique and important applications. The networks producing substantial
bottom-line is that our customers wish resultant savings. In a deregulated
to obtain a greater degree of useful environment the TR2000 provides the Key Functions
information to gain a competitive necessary data to increase revenues. • Very high speed recording
advantage, retain their customers and sampling at up to 195 kHz
lower operational costs. (optional)
Software Overview • Transient fault recorder
The TR2000 performs Transient up to 384 samples per cycle
Recording, Phasor Measurement, The TR2000 is enhanced with a wide • Disturbance recorder
Disturbance Recording, Sequence of range of application software, utilizing (2 samples per cycle)
Events Recording, Power Quality Windows95™, Windows98™ and • Disturbance logger
Monitoring, and Data Logging, WindowsNT™ and includes functions for (1 sample per 2 cycles, optional)
simultaneously. communicating, configuring, download- • Trend recording
ing, displaying and analyzing the TR2000 • Power quality monitor
The TR2000 has many functions aimed itself and its records. Special applications • Stability monitor (optional —
at obtaining not just standard data, but are used to report on a range of param- Synchrophasor measurement)
more useful information and presenting eters that define power quality. Auto- • Fault locator
it in such a way as to aid engineering mated processes include an Expert • Real time monitor
personnel making rapid decisions. For System to minimize the amount of • Sequence of events recorder
a relatively small capital outlay the engineering time needed to process the • On line switchgear and battery
recorder can have a big impact on the data records. A flexible reporting scheme monitor
effectiveness of the power system, via enables the right information to be sent • Energy meter with peak demand
protection, monitoring, minimal to the right person at the right time and • Plant commissioning and
maintenance and asset management. enables the selling of data to Energy diagnostic tool
The TR2000 family has a range of Service Providers. • Electronic chart recorder

4.12
Very high speed Triggers for the Disturbance Recorder
include low frequency oscillation on the
Transient Recorder power & frequency signals.
The high speed option allows for all
analog inputs to be sampled synchro-
nously up to 195,000 times per second. Disturbance Logger
Digital inputs can also be sampled at this
rate although in most cases they would As an option all of the RMS and phasor
be recorded at an integer submultiple. quantities can be recorded continuously
in a 2 week circular buffer. Very subtle
The high speed recorder is ideally suited events, which do not trigger the Distur-
to special applications such as lightning bance Recorder, can be recovered and
studies, monitoring high speed switching analyzed from the Disturbance Logger.
in Static VAr compensators (SVCs) and
Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS).
Trend Recording
Transient Fault Recorder The input and computed quantities are
logged as maximum, minimum and
Analog inputs are sampled at up to 384 average quantities every minute. One
samples per cycle with a maximum years worth of data is saved by the
record length of 30 seconds. The VT & system. This enables historical data at
CT waveforms and auxiliary protection a reduced sampling rate, to be
contacts are recorded before, during and retrieved for trend and power quality
after a fault clearance. Expert System analysis. The data can be used to
software is used to analyze this data and replace circular chart recorders to verify
report on any abnormalities. Other voltage regulation and balancing.
information can be extracted for fault
impedance calculations, power quality
and system maintenance. Power Quality Monitor
The transient fault recorder is used for Power quality can be determined by a
post fault analysis in verifying protection set of parameters. Those recorded by
and circuit breaker operations and also the TR2000 series include:
fault clearance times. Information about • Voltage and frequency profiles
fault type, fault levels and duration are an • Voltage dips and surges
aid to fault location and clearance. • Loss of supply
Transient and incipient faults are also • Harmonic content
quantified, to allow improvements in • Flicker
supply security to be made. • Imbalance (voltage)
• Watts

Disturbance Recorder Voltage dips are stored in a database


and are classified by severity and
Analog inputs are stored at 2 samples duration. A 3-D plot identifies any
per cycle with a maximum recording problem equipment or sites. Compari-
length of 30 minutes. The disturbance sons of different sites or improvements
recorder provides information which in performance are possible following
enables improved understanding of the system reinforcement or changes in
power network. protection settings.

Longer term events are monitored by the Flexible display options allow this
Disturbance Recorder. RMS and phasor information to be shown in a wide
information are stored per channel, along range of styles: text or graphics,
with frequency from 2 channels. These histograms, scatter plots, etc. Mea-
are used to compute a wide variety of surements can be compared with
power system quantities. This function is standard values, such as IEEE519.
particularly useful in recording reclose
sequences and power and frequency
stability events. Additionally, it can be
used to extend the pre and post fault
times of a transient record.

4.13
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
Stability Monitor
Sequence of Events On-line Switch Gear
A very powerful feature of the TR2000
Recorder and Battery Condition
series is the ability to trigger on and
record differential phasor measurements.
Monitoring
Because the inputs are sampled at very All transitions on the digital inputs of
regular intervals, the absolute angle of the the TR2000 are recorded and can be Circuit breaker operations are recorded
positive sequence voltage vector can be displayed independently or with a and then analyzed by the Expert
computed very accurately. This value is disturbance or logger record. The time System. The measurements from each
compared with the angle from a remote resolution is 1 ms. Input point and time operation are stored in a database and
location, normally the far end of a filtering are available to limit the number can be used in a number of program-
transmission line. Since the two TR2000s of events displayed. mable contact wear formulas.
are effectively time locked together via an
internal GPS receiver or external PPS The accumulated number of operations,
and serial time code the difference in arcing current and arcing time all
phase angle is used as a measure of contribute to wear of the main contacts.
system stability. An added feature of the TR2000 is that
by selecting one of the three standard
formulas the optimum service time for
each of switchgear can be determined.
Fault Locator
The TR2000 series can also monitor
Based on the information in a transient the breaker coil currents and battery
record of a line fault and a model of the voltage. Trip coil profiling is a diagnos-
transmission line impedance the distance tic tool used to highlight any degrada-
to fault can be calculated. Source and tion in the operation of circuit breakers.
remote end impedances, remote end
infeed and mutual coupling are used to
compute a more accurate distance.
Energy Meter
The source, remote and line impedances
may be entered in sequence component, The power values from the logger are
per phase or per unit form. The fault used to compute energy demand
distance is computed several times over a variable interval. Peak demand
during the period of the fault and the and power factor can be tracked to
results averaged. The fault impedance is help minimize energy cost for large
also returned. This can be used with a consumers.
complex impedance model to locate the
source of a fault in a distribution network.

Real Time Monitor


As well as triggering and logging the
TR2000 series includes the ability to
view analog and digital inputs and
computed values in near real time.
Measured values and waveforms can
be seen remotely. These can replace or
act as backup systems for:
• Waveform oscilloscope
• Panel meters
• Annunciator panel
• Vector display

4.14
Plant Commissioning and Purchasing Information
Diagnostic Tool
User Programmable
The extensive set of functions within Sampling up to 384 samp/cyc
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Display Station Analysis (DSA) allow it to
be used in the installation and commis- TR-2108 8 Analog / 16 Digital Inputs
sioning of power equipment. Test TR-2116 16 Analog / 32 Digital Inputs
records can be taken either manually or TR-2124 24 Analog / 48 Digital Inputs
automatically and analyzed with DSA to TR-2132 32 Analog / 64 Digital Inputs
check for correct operation of
switchgear, transformers, etc. These User Programmable
records can be archived and used for Sampling up to 195 kHz
MODEL DESCRIPTION
comparison during future diagnostic
checks. TR-2208 8 Analog / 16 Digital Inputs
TR-2216 16 Analog / 32 Digital Inputs
TR-2224 24 Analog / 48 Digital Inputs
TR-2232 32 Analog / 64 Digital Inputs
Effective Solutions
Effective solutions to potential sources
of measurement error are incorporated
in the design of the TR2000 series.
Possible errors and their related
solution are shown below:
PROBLEMS

SOLUTIONS

4.15
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
TR2000 Series Specifications RECORDING (DISTURBANCE LOGGING) – OPTIONAL
sample rate 1/2 x supply frequency (25/30 Hz)
INPUTS recording time 2 weeks (circulating buffer)
no. of channels 8, 16, 24 or 32 Analog
16, 32, 48 or 64 Digital computed values As above
larger systems available
Recording (trend)
voltage inputs 63 - 120V RMS typical sampling interval 1 minute – data can be retrieved at
up to a 60 minute interval
current inputs 1A or 5A RMS nominal
typical record length 52 weeks (circulating buffer)
over range 212 Vrms (voltage) stored parameters Maximum, minimum & average voltage,
Selectable for current (x1 –x20) current, frequency (2), power, flicker,
harmonics & imbalance. Digital data in SER
frequency response DC – 1/2 sampling rate format at user defined time resolution.
accuracy Better than 0.1% of full scale @25°C. Inputs
can be temperature compensated and are TRIGGERING (TRANSIENT)
software calibrated (no pots required) analog channels Over/under RMS level (or DC),
Rate-of-Change and THD per analog input.
digital inputs 24 / 48 / 125 / 250 V dc, normally open 2 positive, zero and negative sequence
or closed, wetted contact triggers per 8 analog inputs. 2 over, under
and R-o-C frequency triggers per chassis.
digital debounce 0 – 10ms in 1ms increments 1 differential frequency trigger per chassis
(for trigger validation only)
accuracy 0.5%
RECORDING (TRANSIENT)
recording resolution 16 bits. 65536 levels (15 plus sign) digital channels Normal to alarm state and return to normal
state. Edge or level sensitive
sample rate TR2100 – up to 384 samples per cycle
COMTRADE rates supported programmability Triggering on any number of analog
TR2200 – up to 195 kHz or digital channels
Analog and digital can have different rates cross trigger Allows unlimited number of recorder
pre-fault time 2 – 500 cycles channels with precise time sync
From disturbance triggers
post-fault time Fault length will extend as long as a trigger
condition exists. Minimum is 8 – 100 cycles TRIGGERING (DISTURBANCE)
analog channels Under/over level of fundemental and R-o-C
safety window Recording time after active trigger: Power & frequency oscillation
4–16 cycles Imbalance & impedance
Cross trigger from transient recorder
maximum length Maximum record size: 1 – 30 sec.
This prevents memory filling with a SYSTEM TIMING
continuous trigger time source Internal GPS receiver (antenna included)
synchronization All analog channels sampled together and accuracy Normally better than +/- 60 ns
time tagged to better than +/- 100 ns.
back up clocks Dual, 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillators
RECORDING (DISTURBANCE)
sample rate 2 x supply frequency (100/120 Hz) range Time and date. Year 2000 compliant.
(including leap year and day of year)
pre-fault 10 sec. to 10 min.
synchronization 1 pulse per second on optical port. Any
post-fault time Fault length will extend as long number of systems can be linked together
as a trigger point condition exists
Minimum value is 30 sec. – 5 min. serial time code Time code input or output for
synchronization of linked systems
maximum record Absolute maximum size 1 – 30 min. length.

computed values Voltage & current, real power, reactive


at PC power, apparent power, power factor,
total harmonic distortion and frequency (x2)
Positive, negative & zero sequence
components

4.16
COMMUNICATIONS VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
serial ports Up to 4 x RS232 type isolation Channel to channel
Channel to ground
default setting 57.6K baud, 8 bits, 1 stop, no parity (as per IEC 255-5, IEEE C37.90)
modem Hayes compatible type internal or external, impulse voltage 5 kV
fax compatible withstand 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
(as per IEC 255-5, IEEE C37.90)
phone line sharing External unit to share a single phone line
with a station phone or other IEDs surge withstand 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
damped sine wave
network connection 10Base2 (50 Ω coax & BNC) or 10BaseT (as per IEC 255-22-1, IEEEC37.90)
network protocol TCP IP RFI as per IEC
801-3, IEC
DATA STORAGE 801-6 and IEEEC37.90 (10V/M)
buffer storage 32 MB RAM
ESD as per IEC
program storage 4 MB flash ROM 801-2
permanent storage 3.5" hard disk – 13 Gbytes
ENCLOSURE
Front Panel Display cabinet Steel 19" rack mounting cabinet
LED indicators Power OK (Green) 8 & 16 channel – 6U
Battery OK (Green) 24 & 32 channel – 8U
System on line (Green) Wall mount and portable options
Data available (Amber) weight 15 kg
Communication in progress (Amber)
Communication failure (Red) ENVIRONMENT
Loss of time sync (Red) operating temperature -10 to 55°C
Disk fault (Red) 14 to 131°F
Temperature fault (Red)
Attention (Red) relative humidity 0 – 97% non condensing
STATUS RELAYS
max. number of outputs 32 (1 per analog in)
OPTIONS
contact rating 10 W max.
0.5 A max. internal
300 V dc / 240 V ac max. Modem card
N/O contacts available Network card
Synchrophasor software (Differential Phasor Measurements)
Power Supply Disturbance Logger software
input voltage options 100-300Vdc/120/24oVac external
or 88-164DC Range of wall mounting enclosures
Interface equipment for current channels
power requirement 60VA (16 channel) (wedding ring CTs, clamp CTs, shunt resistors)
70VA (32 channel) Telephone line sharing unit
Hall effect CTs for DC battery supply
modem
software
Display Station (required)
Expert System
Voltage Dip database
Switchgear Maintenance database
Distance to Fault

4.17
AMETEK
Recorders
Transient Recorders
TR100 Series The TR’s unique dynamic post fault
length optimizes data memory usage
Transient Recorders • 8 to 32 Analog Channels by terminating the recording of a
record once a steady state has
• 16 to 64 Digital Channels returned for a predefined period. Short
• Simple-to-Service Plug-in faults generate short records while a
Circuit Card Design longer fault will cause the fault
recording period to be extended.
• Substation Environment
Qualified Local parameter setting and record
transfer is performed simply by
• Extensive, Flexible Remote- plugging in a portable computer
Controlled Triggering running Ametek’s Windows™ based
software into the port on the front
• Full 12-Bit A/D With
panel of the TR-100. One computer
Simultaneous Sampling
can be used for many
The Transient Recorder is an essential • DC Coupling Standard TR-100’s, thereby reducing costs
monitoring requirement for transmis- and making the parameter and fault
• Standard ISA Bus record data more secure.
sion, distribution, generation or any
Architecture For Easy
major user of power.
Upgrades The TR-100 is typically part of an
Ametek’s years of application knowl- integrated monitoring network with
• Simple Point-And-Click multiple TR’s located within substations
edge and experience, together with our Windows Interface
versatile product range, can meet the over a region, and a Windows™ based
requirements of markets demanding • Full Context-Sensitive Help Master Station normally located in the
anything from a small low cost TR up engineering department or in a control
to the needs of a large distributed • Waveforms Displayed At center running Ametek’s Communica-
network of TR’s. Highest Resolution Possible tion, Configuration and Analysis
On Your Monitor software. Communications between
The TR-100 Series introduces to the the Master Station and the TR’s is
• Fault, Trend, Flicker and normally by plug-in data modems using
market a Transient Fault Recording Harmonic Recording
System with unparalleled levels of the local telephone exchange,
Simultaneously but other networks can be supported.
flexibility, while providing the user with
the worlds most user friendly • Traditional Fault Recording
TR available today. Any number of TR-100 recorders can
• Optimize Switchgear be cross-triggered together to extend
Two 19” rack mounting units are Maintenance the number of analog and digital
available with up to 32 analog/64 digital channels forming a single system.
input channels on the TR-132 and up • Long-Term Load Data For
to 16 analog/32 digital input channels Planning
on the TR-116. The TR will operate as • Harmonic Recording
a stand-alone system or link to a PC-
based Master Station. In terms of • Voltage Quality Monitoring
performance, the system has a sample
rate of up to 192 samples per cycle, • Windows™ Based Graphical
with a vast selection of standard User Interface (GUI) For
triggers simultaneously available on Ease Of Use
each channel or on a system basis,
including over and under limit violation
with adjustable hysteresis, rate of
change, zero and negative sequence,
sub-cycle drop out (sinewave quality)
and frequency.

The high speed, high resolution


recording and flexible triggering modes
make the Ametek TR ideal for
capturing all forms of line transients
from conductor clashes and lightning
strikes to spikes and sub-cycle
distortion. It can be used for verifying
protection/breaker operation as well as
monitoring power quality.
4.18
Features Printing of Fault Records
HEADER
■ 486 industrial grade CPU Fault records may be printed
TR-100 locally by the TR-100 or TR-2000
TRANSIENT RECORDER
as shown in the sample on the
■ Downloadable firmware left, or remotely at the Master
Location
Machine Name
:
:
Dartford
Demo 1 Station using Ametek Analysis
■ 16 Mbytes of RAM memory Recorder Number

Trigger
:

:
2

Analogue under on channel 1 'VRed'


software. Every record has the
(optional internal hard disk drive) Trigger time : 14 Aug 1995 11:42:50.481 location of the recorder, the time
Analogue channels
and date of the record and the
Channel Definition Triggering source of the trigger.
■ Up to 192 samples per cycle Channel Nominal F.S.D Units Over Under SubC ROC

sample rate 1
2
VRed
VYellow
132.2
132.2
176.2
176.2
kV
kV
98%, 0%
98%, 0%
CONFIGURATION
3
4 -
VBlue 132.2
0.0
176.2
0.0
kV 98%, 0%
The names, scales and trigger
5 IRed 700.0 14000.0 A
6 IYellow 700.0 14000.0 A levels of each analog and digital
■ Real time graphical display and 7
8
IBlue
INeutral
700.0
700.0
14000.0
14000.0
A
A 110%, 0%
channel are shown next.
numeric measurement for easy Phase Groups

and accurate trigger level setting Phase Group Definition Triggering


PHASE GROUP
Channels Zero seq. Neg. seq.
CONFIGURATION
1 1,2,3 Phase group 1
2 4,5,6 Phase group 2 Two phase groups are available
■ Software triggers available per every 8 inputs.
simultaneously Digital Channels

Channel Definition Triggering

• Under limit violation with Channel Normal Profile

adjustable hysteresis per input 1 Digital 1


2 Digital 2
3 Digital 3
Open
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
Edge

(real time display/ 4 Digital 4


5 Digital 5
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
6 Digital 6 Open Yes Edge
measurement available) 7 Digital 7
8 Digital 8
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
9 Digital 9 Open Yes
• Over limit violation with 10 Digital 10
11 Digital 11
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
12 Digital 12 Open Yes
adjustable hysteresis per input 13 Digital 13
14 Digital 14
Open
Open
Yes
Yes

(real time display/ 15 Cross Trigger


16 Digital 16
Open
Open
No
Yes

measurement available) Digital debounce : 10 ms

• Rate of change trigger per Fault profile

input Fault Level - RMS

• Sub-cycle drop out (sinewave Analogue Channel Pre-fault Immediate Final Post-clearance Units
Min. Max Units
RECORD PROFILE
1 VRed 132.1 127.6 105.4 132.5 kV kV The configuration is followed by a
distortion) trigger per input 2
3
VYellow
VBlue
132.7
132.8
132.0
132.1
132.0
131.8
132.0
132.1
kV
kV
kV
kV
profile of the record with actual
4 - 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
• Negative sequence component 5
6
IRed
IYellow
710.9
704.1
1401.4
697.3
2802.7
697.3
690.4
717.8
-
A
A
-
A
A signal levels, durations and digital
7 IBlue 704.1 690.4 710.9 697.3 A
(real time display/ 8 INeutral 0.0 1045.9 2795.9 0.0 A
A
A
transition times measured from
measurement available) Digital Transitions
the data.
• Zero sequence component Digital Channel

1 Digital 1
State

Alarm
Time (ms)

(real time display/ 2 Digital 2 Normal 46

measurement available)
• Over, Under and Rate-of- Fault Duration : 70 ms Time markers: 10 ms
8

Change of Frequency (1 per GRAPHICAL PLOT


chassis) The analog and digital inputs are
• Digital Inputs; level, or edge then displayed in graphical form
with horizontal lines indicating the
with selectable return-to-
start and end of the trigger
normal triggering
16
15

14
13

12
11

10
9

8
7

6
5

4
3

2
1

condition.

■ DC pulse or optional IRIG-B (time


code) time synchronization

4.19
AMETEK
Recorders

Mechanical SERIAL STATUS RELAYS


OperatingVoltage: 24, 48, 125 or 250V DC external
COMMUNICATIONS
Specifications Port Types: 2 x RS-232, one local, one coil supply
remote. Contact Rating: 125V DC/380V AC, 5A max.
Programming: Recorder identification. Indication: Power OK.
(Location/Name) Armed/ready.
Channel parameters and labels. Attention.
INPUTS System triggered
Trigger levels and enables.
Voltage Inputs: 69-120V rms nominal, (minimum on time 500mS).
Sample rate and fault capture
212V rms full scale
times.
Current Inputs: Typically 1 or 5A rms selected
Memory operation
by external shunt or CICT. OPERATING VOLTAGES
(Stop/Overwrite).
Input Coupling: DC (0) to 3,000Hz, (+0dB, -3dB),
Accuracy: Better than 0.5% F.S.
Time and Date Prime Power: 88 to 300V DC, 85 to 264V AC
Printer setup standard. 24 or 48V DC
Digital Input FCV: 24, 48, 125 or 250V dc wetted
Modem setup optional.
contact NO/NC.
Digital Input Debounce: Modem: Hayes compatible, internal or Burden: <20 VA load (8 channels)
0 to 10mSec selectable in 1mS
external type. Backup Battery: Internal battery for real-time
clock and parameter memory.
steps (for triggering only)
Capacity:
TR-116 Max.: 16 analog (V or I selectable), PRINTING (Local to Recorder)
32 digital. Printer Port: Standard Centronics type. ENVIRONMENTAL
TR-132 Max.: 32 analog (V or I selectable), 64 Printer Selection: Consult factory for latest list of Operating Temperature:
digital. laser, inkjet and dot matrix -10˚C to 55˚C.
Input Expansion: In increments of 8 analog and 16 printers. Humidity: 0 to 95% RH non condensing.
digital. Systems to 128 analog Output Reports: System configuration. Isolation: 2kV rms for 1 minute (channel
inputs or more are available. Fault record header. to channel and channel to
Fault record profile comprised ground).
of measured values for … 1.5kV rms on power supply
RECORDING Fault duration and faulted Impulse Withstand:
Resolution: 12 bit A/D (1:4096). channel. 5kV, 1.2/50µSec, 0.5 joule.
Media: 16 Mbytes RAM, optional Pre, during and post Surge Withstand: 2.5kV, 1MHz damped sine wave
internal hard disk drive. fault values per analog per standards …
Sampling Rate: User selected channel. IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1-1989.
(24-192 samples/cycle) Digital channel timing. IEC 255-4.
Total Recording Time Plot of fault record IEC 255-5.
RAM: 16 Mbytes (approx. 37 seconds Diagnostics and error log. RFI Protection: Per IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2-1987.
at 96 samples/cycle with 32
channels)
Hard Drive: Up to a maximum of 1024 records. TIME BASE MECHANICAL DETAILS
Pre-fault Time: 2 to 100 cycles. Resolution: 0.1mSec. TR-116 Rack: 19” wide rack, 30lbs (13.7 Kg)
Post-fault Time: 8 cycles to 10 Sec. Fault length Internal Clock Accuracy: 7U high (12.23”).
can optionally extend for as Better than 1 Sec. per day. TR-132 Rack: 19” wide rack, 60lbs (27.4 Kg)
long as a trigger condition Synchronization: 11U high (19.23”).
exists to a max. limit. DC (std.): 1 pulse per second, minute or Mounted: 19” rack mounted.
Maximum Record Length: 15 sec. hour on digital input 16. Terminals: Rear access screw compression
Synchronization: All channels sampled IRIG-B (opt.): From station clock. type - up to 14ga.
simultaneously. DL8000 Size: 21 1/8”W x 11 3/4”H x 21 3/4”D
Multi-Recorder Synchronization: 541.7mm x 301.3mm x
Channels between cross FRONT PANEL 557.7mm
triggered recorders are timed Weight: 50 lbs (22.7Kg)
to within 1 sample. STATUS DISPLAY
LED Indicators: Power on (green).
Armed/ready (green).
TRIGGERING New events (amber).
Communications (amber).
Analog: Over limit violation with
Attention (red).
hysteresis
Push Button: Test, disarm and rearm
Under limit violation with
recorder.
hysteresis
Options: Hard drive
Rate of Change
Trend recording
Zero sequence
Harmonic recording
Negative sequence
DNP 3.0
Sub-cycle drop out
Fax output
(Sinewave Quality)
Flicker Recording
Frequency
Ethernet
Accuracy: Better than 2%.
Digital: Alarm and return to normal,
edge or level sensitive.

4.20
SPECIFICATIONS
FILE: TR116.1 FH
27.000 (685.80)

21.000 (533.40)

TR-116 and TR-132


TOP AND BOTTOM BOLT PLAN

27.500 (698.50)

CABLE CUTOUTS W/ REMOVABLE COVERS


30.000 (762.00)

6.000 (152.40)

10.000 (254.00)

TR-116 DIGITAL
TRANSIENT
RECORDER

MODEM

TR-116 DIGITAL
TRANSIENT
RECORDER

85.837 (2180.27)

TR-116 & TR-132 TOP VIEW

TS1 TS1

90.25 (2292) TS2 TS7 TS7 TS2

TS3 TS8 TS8 TS3

TS4 TS9 TS9 TS4


22.00
(558.80)
TS5 TS10 TS10 TS5

TS6 TS11 TS11 TS6


FILE: TR116.2 FH
FRONT / REAR
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW
DOOR DETAIL
(DOORS REMOVED) (DOORS REMOVED)
12.50
(317.50)
TR-116 FRONT VIEW TR-116 REAR VIEW
TRANSIENT RECORDER
ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
TR-116 PHONE COMM MODEM/ IRIG-B

LINE LINE PRINTER RS-232 INPUT

10.460 POWER ON

(265.68) BACKUP BATTERY


POWER

ARMED/READY

NEW EVENTS F2 F1 (-) (+) (G)

7.5 COMMUNICATIONS 1
ANALOG INPUTS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
DIGITAL INPUTS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SUPPLY
STATUS
1 2 3 4

(190.50) ATTENTION
+ - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1.17
TEST ANALOG INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS
(29.72)
HOLD FOR 3 SECONDS LOCAL
TO DISARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
PRESS AND RELEASE
RS-232
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -

2.571
TORE-ARM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(65.31)

1.480 18.260 (463.80)


1.POWER
(37.59) 2.011 2.ON LINE
18.900 (480.06) (51.09) 3.ATTENTION
4.TRIGGERED

TR-132 REAR VIEW

TR-132 FRONT VIEW


ROCHESTER
TRANSIENT RECORDER

ROCHESTER INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS TR-132


PHONE COMM MODEM/ IRIG-B

LINE LINE PRINTE RS-232 INPUT

5.250
(133.35) POWER

F2 F1 (-) (+) (G)

POWER ON

BACKUP BATTERY
ANALOG INPUTS DIGITAL STATU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SUPPL 1 2 3 4

ARMED/READY + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

5.750 NEW EVENTS

(146.05)
COMMUNICATIONS
ANALOG INPUTS DIGITAL
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ATTENTION

9.581
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TES
HOLD FOR 3 SECONDS
(243.37)
19.220 TO DISARM
PRESS AND RELEASE
TO RE-ARM
LOCAL
RS-232 ANALOG INPUTS
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
DIGITAL
43 44 45 46 47 48

(488.19) 9.021
+ - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -

(229.14)
ANALOGINPUT DIGITALINPUTS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

5.250 + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -

(133.35)

WIRING HARNESS 1. POWER


18.260[463.80]
18.900[480.06]
SUPPORT HARDWARE 2. ON LINE
3. ATTENTION
4. TRIGGERED
TR-132
4.21
AMETEK
Transient
RecordersRecorders
Master Station Analysis File Features:
Software
• Full support of the Comtrade file
After retrieving the necessary fault format
records using the communications
software, the analysis package allows
the Master Station to display fault
records, analyze them and print to any
Display Features:
Windows™ supported printer.
Analog Trigger Settings Window, where the
• Add, remove or rearrange
This analysis software provides a Real Time Values for each Voltage and waveforms on screen
complete set of functions for complete Current Input can be read. • Place waveform cursors to read
power system fault analysis with built in time and amplitude
tools to simplify the setup of displays • Select channels and time range
and printer functions. The user for display, printing or
interface follows the recommended modification of display
Windows conventions and gives parameters
several options to manipulate wave- • Dynamic scaling of waveforms
forms through keyboard and/or mouse
operation.
Analysis Features:

• Reports channel that triggered


each fault record
• Instant graphic measurements of
time and amplitude differences
between two points on waveform
Main Operating Parameters are set up from
this window.
Printing Features:
• Works with nearly all Windows™
supported printers
• High-resolution printing
• Color printing

Zero and Negative Sequence Component


Trigger Settings Window, where three
channels make up a Phase Group. The Real
Time Sequence Components are displayed.
Color coding allows user to verify proper
channel selection and wiring.

4.22
Expert System Software

The suite of Expert System Software


consists of three separate packages
that are linked together by a shared
database created by the user in the
Automated Analysis portion of the
software.

The three packages are the Expert


System (Automated Analysis), Voltage
Dip Analysis, and Breaker Performance
Monitor.
Basic Substation Configuration
Manual Analysis Output
This screen is used to configure each
circuit being monitored and the “filters” Above are the results from manually
used to create reports. Thereby calling up the automated analysis.
increasing the efficient utilization of Below is an Explanation Window that
data while reducing workload. can be accessed for a summary of
why the program reached the
conclusion it did.

Automated Analysis Results

Above is a sample of the automated


analysis results obtained automatically
during Auto-poll or Auto-call. This text
can be viewed without having to open
and view the waveform data. The full
waveform/fault data is still available for
analysis if needed.

4.23
AMETEK
Recorders
Voltage Dip Analysis Breaker Performance
Monitor
Below is a sample plot from the After each fault has been analyzed by
Voltage Dip Analysis software package. the Expert System, the results can be
This shows the ability to take a series passed to the Breaker Performance
of faults from a specific location and Monitor software (BPM). At the bottom
plot the voltage retained against the is the BPM setup screen.
duration of the faults, showing the
quantity of faults for each interval/ The BPM software uses the data for
retention. This is useful for comparing each breaker operation to track
voltage quality at different locations or breaker wear 3 different ways: the
at the same location after changes to cumulative current interrupted (shown
the power system have been made. at top right), the duty interrupted by the
This can also be used to show breaker based in int (where n is user
variations in the voltage retained as defined) or the number of operations
faults propagate through the various for a breaker (shown at bottom right).
voltage levels. Plots can be custom-
ized for time interval, magnitude and Since the information is kept in a
voltage drop. This allows users to database, it is easy to switch between
customize the plots shown to manage- the 3 methods eliminating the need for
ment or users of electrical power. stand-alone devices.

Using the Voltage Dip Analysis soft-


ware, the same series of faults can be
plotted against standard limit curves
such as CEBEMA or other user created
curves as shown below.

4.24
Power Analysis Tools Distance-To-Fault
Ametek’ Power Analysis Tools (PAT) is The Distance-To-Fault (DTF) program
a set of mathematical calculations uses user-entered line parameters to
which can be applied to waveforms analyze fault data and calculate
displayed using Display Station distance to the fault from the recorder
software. PAT contains 3-phase which saw the fault. DTF is accurate to
calculations for lines or circuits, yielding 2% when untapped 2-terminal trans-
peak, RMS, per unit values, power mission lines are analyzed. It cannot be
quantities (MVA, MW, MVAR, X/R), used on tapped or multi-terminal lines.
frequency, distortion and sequence The user must have some knowledge
components. of line characteristics as computed by
Event Waveform Display Window, with the EMTP or similar computer simulations
It also provides phasor display and Power Analysis Toolkit active. Single to use DTF.
harmonic analysis. PAT is used by Channel Calculations made on any channel
calling the set of tool ICONs to the over a selected time frame. Even if DTF isn't used for new-real time
screen, then selecting a waveform and fault location and crew dispatch, it is a
tool to be used. PAT will then display useful tool for verifying power system
the resulting graphical and tabular models used for relay settings.
data.

The use of color and graphics


enhances the understanding of the
power system situation.

For added enhancement to analyzing


data, there are now a variety of
calculations that can be done to create
vrtual channels.

Event Waveform Display Window, with the


Power Analysis Toolkit active. Sequence
Components calculated on a Phase Group
basis. A Phasor Diagram is also displayed Event Waveform Display Window, with fault
with the angle based on the start of the location results identified.
selected region.

Event Waveform Display Window, with the


Power Analysis Toolkit active. Harmonic
Analysis on any channel over a selected
time frame.

4.25
AMETEK
Recorders

Recording Simultaneous Harmonix


Faults, Trend Data,
Harmonic Profiles,
Flicker, and other power
parameters

The Ametek recorders have the ability


to record faults, trend data and
harmonic profiles simultaneously
eliminating the need for circular chart
recorders or other IED’s.

The trend duration varies by recorder


and the storage interval varies by Recording Harmonic Spectrum
parameter. Custom Limits
The TR-100, TR-2000 and PQR all
This Trend Data can be used for load have the ability to periodically record a This plot shows the same data plotted
balancing, voltage regulation verifica- harmonic spectrum from channels in against a standard limit such as
tion, equipment sizing and many other the recorder. A variety of plotting IEEE519 or EN50160 (EN is shown
applications. methods are available to the user. above). Custom limits can be created
Above is a sample file showing a 12- by the user. The green portion of the
hour interval at a 10 minute sample plot show the % samples (over the time
rate. The magnitude is plotted as a % window plotted) that were between 0-
of the fundamental frequency (50/60Hz) 5% of the maximum recorded value for
input magnitude. It can also be plotted that harmonic. The blue portion is the
as an absolute magnitude. This shows relative number of samples that were
all of the odd harmonics plus THD as between 5-95% of the maximum
an average of all phases of the circuit. recorded value and the red is the
Additional plot options include compar- relative number of samples in the 95-
ing the minimum, maximum and 100% range. Additionally, single
average magnitudes of various sample intervals for the harmonics for
harmonics recorded for the time all 3 phases can be displayed.
window selected.

4.26
Optional Hardware
Resistive Current Shunt Current Isolator CT All CICT’s connect safely and easily to
existing CT secondary wiring without
The Resistive Current Shunt is The clip-on Current Isolator CT (CICT) alteration, shunts or test switches. So
designed for permanent applications is ideal for monitoring current channels you’ll save on expensive installation
as an interface from the CT second- when it is not possible to interrupt the time and hardware.
ary wiring to the Ametek family of CT circuit to install a resistive shunt.
recorders. You can also use the CICT’s for They can be mounted up to 2,000 feet
temporary/portable installations. from the recorder, using standard
The shunt’s compact design make it shielded cables.
ideal for mounting within fault recorder
panels. DNP 3.0 Protocol

Being resistive rather than inductive, The Ametek recorders have the ability
greater levels of accuracy in terms of to communicate to the SCADA/EMS
phase angle and magnitude are system using the DNP 3.0 protocol.
possible. Thus, Ametek recommends Data available includes magnitudes
the use of this type of shunt, from any channel, frequency, or profile
particularly in applications where from the most recent event and
Distance to Fault calculations are to be diagnostic data.
made or knowing DC off-sets during
the fault is critical. Ranges: 1.0A up to 12.5A nominal. Full
scale is 20 times nominal

4.27
AMETEK
Recorders

Ametek Customer
Support
Factory Acceptance Ametek encourages customers to visit
the factory at any time. As part of the
Testing system purchase, you can send
personnel in to witness our standard
testing of the recorders. An added
benefit is the exposure your personnel
will get to the basic operation of the
recorder and associated software. This
considerably reduces the learning
curve in most situations for those that
have not used the software or record-
ers previously.

Ametek offers a full compliment of


Training Training Courses for both the recorders
and software. Most effective after the
systems have been installed and in use
for a period of time, the classes range
from Familiarization Training to Re-
corder Operation, Software Operation
and System Troubleshooting. These
courses can be held either at your site
or at the factory – whatever is most
convenient for your personnel.

Installation and To assist in starting up the systems,


Ametek can supply a qualified Field
Start-up Services Service Technician to verify system
configuration, settings and field wiring.
At the same time, your technicians get
additional exposure to both the
hardware and software making future
operation easier for them. Additional
services may be contracted to do
complete installation including laying
field wiring for the inputs. Ametek also
provides a toll-free number (for the US
and Canada) for technical support any
time you have questions.

4.28
DL-8000 and
DL-9000 Portable
Recorders

The DL-8000 and DL-9000


are advanced power
monitoring systems in a
rugged portable package.

The DL-8000 and DL-9000 portable


systems are equipped to support a
range of measurement transducers and
connection options providing an
attractive and flexible monitoring The DL-8000 and DL-9000 portables The DL8000 and DL-9000 portables
system for both the power utility and have been designed to be easily have identical technical specifications
industrial user. installed on-site, vastly reducing any to the TR-100 and TR-2000 recorders
commissioning time. The system with some additional features and
An extensive suite of Windows™ based includes optional push-fit (shrouded) accessories to enhance portability and
software is available with the portable protective rear panel connections to simplify equipment installation.
system for local (lap-top PC) or remote analog and digital measurement points
setup, data retrieval, analysis and using fused jaw-clips, pigtail leads and
reporting via modem or network non-invasive CT clamps.
communications.

• Motor Starts
• Relay, Fuse and recloser
coordination and optimization
• Load Balancing
• Harmonic magnitudes
• Co-gen plant monitoring
• Motor control center monitoring
• Sags and Swells
• Steady-State Voltage Compliance
• Surges and transient changes
• Equipment Sizing
• Data for K-Factor calculations
needs
• Flicker

4.29
AMETEK
Recorders
Features:
• Rugged Enclosure with Carry
Handle
• Fault Recording using a Wide
Range of Programmable Triggers
• Power Quality Event Capture and
Analysis
• Provides 8 Analog/16 Digital Input
Channels or optional 16 Analog/
32 Digital Input Channels
• Uses a Range of CT Clamps
for Non-Invasive Connection
• Supports ∆–Y (3 or 4 wire) VT
Connections
• Extensive Windows™ based
Applications Software
• Universal AC/DC Supply
• Logged Recording of Voltage,
Current, Harmonics, Flicker Harmonics Logging Comparing Same
and Frequency using Integral Location at 2 Different Times
Hard Disk

Options:
• Cellular Modem for Remote
Communications
• Ethernet Card for Network
Support
• Push-fit Rear Panel Connectors
and Test Leads for Simple
Installation
• Voltage Divider for 600, 480
and 277V Systems
• CT Interface Unit supporting a
Wide Range of CT Ratios and
scaling

Waveform Capture (simultaneous on up to


16 analog and 32 digital inputs)

4.30
Voltage Fault Propagation Comparing
Voltage Dip Severity at Different Power
System Voltage Levels

Voltage Dip Profiles for Power Quality


Assessment Comparing 2 Sites Over Same
Time Interval

4.31
AMETEK
Recorders
Power and Fault Recorders

P&QR128 and
P&QR256
Comprehensive Power
and Fault Recorders
with Advanced Features

Identify power and fault data with


the affordable P&QR series power
and fault recorders.

Whether you are a utility identifying


power and fault problems on the power
grid, or a facilities manager monitoring
power quality concerns in your plant…
the P&QR Series offers the perfect,
affordable solution you’ve been looking
for.

For Utilities
Deregulation means increased compe-
tition for utilities. Providing affordable Economic Incentives!
power quality affirmation to your key
customers is critical to keep customers One of the biggest reasons to buy your problems using the fault
from migrating away, and to win new new P&QR128 or P&QR256 is purely recording and waveform capture
customers. The P&QR128 and economic! We’ve packed many high capabilities.
P&QR256 are useful for troubleshootin end fault recording functions into a well • The low cost P&QR128 and
relay misoperation. The P&QR Series built unit that is offered at a very low P&QR256 offer great flexibility to
offers utilities incredible flexibility, ease cost. The P&QR Series has many of the Power Quality professional.
of use, durability, and perhaps most the functions that you would expect in For instance, you can take
importantly, dramatic cost savings! a fault and power quality recorder. advantage of its multiple-voltage
However, we would like to point out ranges and selectable CT scaling
many features that are rare for a unit at to obtain improved accuracy by
For Customers this price, and even some features that optimizing your A to D
are not available on other units at any measurement.
For even modest sized power price! • Best of all, these units have
customers, doing business in this optional ethernet or modem
newly deregulated environment, a • First, these Power Quality connectivity so you can get the
power quality monitor is one of the Recorders have enormous data data you need without having to
best investments your company can storage capacity. They come leave your chair.
make! Your power and fault monitor with a standard 6 gigs of storage. • The dynamic P&Qs software will
will help you take surveys of sufficient This gives you plenty of flexibility quickly and easily help you get
length and provide the information for long measurement surveys, or the most out of your P&QR. A
you need to decide exactly how to short highly concentrated data more complete explanation of
best buy your power: spot, flat rate, collection. P&Qs follows.
time of use, seasonal. Your P&QR128 • The units are phase locked • Check out the technical
or P&QR256 can easily pay for itself looped to offer you extraordinary specifications chart to see all the
in a short period of time. Providing sampling accuracy even if the terrific features offered by the
answers about your power consump- frequency you are monitoring P&QR128 and P&QR256.
tion is only the beginning, many shifts. Most competitive
additional benefits are yours with a products don’t have this Whether it’s avoiding a costly plant
P&QR128 or P&QR256 from Ametek capability. shut down, finding power quality
Power Equipment. • Ametek Power Equipment P&QR problems or just making sure that you
Series has excellent RFI rejection, are paying the lowest possible price for
minimizing the unwanted effects your electricity usage… the Ametek
of cell phones, computers, Instrument System P&QR is the right
broadcast, or hand-held radios. solution for you!
• You can identify and isolate

4.32
• Determine the lowest possible
price for power
• Pays for itself in savings
• Large memory capacity allows for
long surveys or short
concentrated data collection
• Extraordinary sampling accuracy
• RFI rejection minimizes the
effects of outside interference
• Isolates problems with waveform
recording
• Optimizes A to D measurements
• Optional internet transports data
to you
• Enclosed unit can be used outdoors

Features
• 8 channel input:
4 voltage, 4 current
• 14 bit recording
• 8 Mbytes internal memory
• 6.4 Gbytes hard disk
• Sample rate 128/cycle
(optional 256/cycle)
• Relay input
• Real time clock
• Measures waveform faults
• Measures voltage dips and
surges
• Measures harmonics
• Measures flicker and imbalance
• Records voltage and current,
frequency and real power
• Computes demand, phase angle, P&Qs
power factor, and sequence This basic communications and Auto-event retrieval
components at PC configuration software provides • The recorder sends data
• Event triggering accuracy is autopoll and autocall support with automatically to the PC where it is
better than 2% auto-event retrieval for the P&QR. As most useful. Retrieval of profile,
• RS232 serial port part of the polling process, the cameo and/or fault data minimizes
• Internal modem option available recorder clock can be updated and time to retrieve data in critical
• Ethernet network option available events can be retrieved. P&Qs is an situations.
• Free phone support abbreviated version of Display Station
• Powerful P&Qs software for and Display Station Analysis. Configuration control
communications and analysis • Recorder configurations for up to
Autopoll/call 10 P&QRs are stored at the PC.
• Operates in a totally automatic P&Qs flags the user if there are
Benefits mode if configured; operating differences for better control.
both in parallel provides added
• Affordable fault recording reliability in detecting problems in 32-bit Windows software
• Provides power quality affirmation communication and minimizing • Operates on the most common
• Simple to use communication expenses. operating systems in use.

4.33
AMETEK
Recorders
Power and Fault Recorders

RiS P&QR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


INPUTS POWER SUPPLY
No. of channels 8 (4 voltage, 4 current) Input voltage range 88–300V dc, 85–264V ac, 50/60Hz
consult factory for other configurations 24 or 48Vdc optional
Voltage inputs (options) 150 V RMS maximum Power requirement 20 VA
300 V RMS maximum Battery Optional 12V for recorder operation
600 V RMS maximum
Star (wye) or delta connections REAL TIME CLOCK
Current inputs (options) 1/5A RMS nominal Clock source 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillator
100/200/500/1000 A RMS nominal Resolution 1 ms.
(1.4V fsd. Int. or ext. burden)
Range Time and date (including leap year
Designed to record to 40% overrange and day of the year).
Frequency response P&QR128 40Hz – 3kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) Synchronization 50/60 Hz from voltage input
DC – 3kHz (+0dB for currents)
Frequency response P&QR256 40Hz – 6kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) COMMUNICATIONS
DC – 6kHz (+0dB, -3dB for currents)
Serial port RS232 type.
Accuracy Better than 0.2% of full scale Speed up to 57 kBaud
Modem (optional) Hayes compatible type internal.
RECORDING (up to 57.6 kBaud)
Recording resolution 14 bits. Network (option) TCP/IP 10Base2 or 10BaseT
Recording accuracy +/- 1 lsb.
Sample rate 128 samples per cycle VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
6.4/7.68k samples per second Isolation Channel to channel (voltage)
option for 256 samples per cycle Channel to ground.
2 samples per cycle for high-speed 2 kV RMS for 1 minute
RMS envelope capture (as per IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-5)
Impulse voltage withstand Channel to channel (voltage)
DATA STORAGE Channel to ground
Internal memory 8 Mbytes 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
Hard disk 6.4 Gbytes (minimum) (as per IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-5)
Electrical fast transient (EFT) 4 kV, 5/50 ns. 15 ms burst length
RECORDED DATA non-maloperate (as per
IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-22-1)
Waveform Capture 4 cycles pre, 12 cycles post
Option for up to 2 seconds Surge withstand (SWC) 2.5 kV, 1 MHz HF burst disturbance
Up to 1 minute of RMS data non-maloperate (as per
IEEE C37.90-1987/IEC 255-22-1)
Trending – (16 weeks) Voltages: 1 minute min/max/avg
Currents: 1 minute min/max/avg RFI immunity 10 V/m 20 MHz – 1 GHz (80% AM
Frequency: 1 minute min/max/avg @ 1 kHz). Non – maloperate (as per
Watts: 1 minute min/max/avg IEEE C37.90-1987/BS EN 50082)
Harmonics: 10 minute RFI emission — radiated 40 dB mV/m (27 – 130 MHz)
min/max/avg/angle 47 dB mV/m (130 MHz – 1 GHz)
to the 50th harmonic EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Imbalance: 10 minute min/max/avg (as per BS EN 50081-1)
Flicker: 10 minute Pst — conducted (150 kHz – 30 Mhz)
Metered values kVAh EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
±kWh — harmonics (100 Hz – 30 MHz)
±kVArh (as per IEC 555 class ‘A’ limits)
Computed (at PC) Phase angle, power factor, demand Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 8 kV contact, 15 kV radiated
(sliding or fixed window) and discharge. Non-maloperate
sequence components (as per IEC 801-2)

EVENT TRIGGERING ENCLOSURE


Trigger parameters Over/under level with hysteresis. Mounting Wall
ROC & THD
Size 200 x 300 x 120 mm
Accuracy Better than 2% (7.87 x 11.8 x 4.7 in.)
Pre-fault time 4 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc); Optional 300 x 400 x 210 mm
1-10 sec. (2 samp/cyc) (11.75 x 16 x 8.25)
Post-fault time 12 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc); Weight 6 Kg. (13.2lbs.)
1-59 sec. (2 samp/cyc) Optional 8kg (17.6 lbs)
External trigger Relay contact (24-120Vdc nominal)
ENVIRONMENT
Operating temperature -10 to 50 °C 14 to 122 °F
Storage temperature -40 to 70 °C -40 to 158 °F
Humidity 5 – 95% RH (non condensing)

4.34
Communications, mathematical functions. There are two
major modules of Ametek software
standard level or rate of change
triggering can be recorded by the TR-
Analysis and available. 100, TR-2000 or P&QR.

System Communications Sets of three analog channels can be


This provides communication to, and defined as phase groups. For each
Configuration configuration of, the TR-100, TR-2000 group, zero and negative sequence
and P&QR series either (1) remotely via component trigger levels can be set.
Software a modem link to a Master Station Again, the display of near real time data
A single communication and anaylis normally located in central engineering ensures correct values are used and
package is used for the TR-100, TR- or at a control center, (2) locally via a inputs are wired in properly (see next
2000 and P&QR series recorders. direct connection on site or (3) via an page). Two phase groups are available
Additionally, when RVComms is used, Ethernet link. per 8 inputs.
the powerful analysis software can be
used for the older TR-1600 series The communications software has a The recorders can be set to dial up the
recorders. unique feature that allows the user to Master Station when a fault is recorded
set over and/or under trigger levels with (Auto Call) and the Master Station can
Ametek’s software programs provide hysteresis on the analog channels with be programmed to contact each
advanced fault analysis, communica- the actual signal displayed in near real recorder in a region at regular intervals
tion and configuration functions in a time. This waveform is overlaid with the to check for new records (Auto Poll). A
486 based PC-compatible (minimum) equivalent trigger levels which improves communications log records any
computer. The programs have a very the ease and accuracy of trigger problems incurred during auto polling.
flexible graphical user interface which settings (see next page).
uses Windows 95™,98™, NT or Unauthorized parameter updates and
Windows 2000™. Many fault analysis Sub cycle drop out or THD triggers record downloading can be protected
features are provided and there are measure the quality of a voltage or by passwords. A recorder may be
optional programs for additional current waveform. Small perturbations remotely triggered from the Master
which would not be detected by Station to generate test records.
Architecture
Centronics
(not available
Typically 69 or on P&QR)
120 VAC nominal Transient
Fault Recorder DNP (optional TR-100,
TR-2000)
Resistive
Typically 1 or Current Local Modem
5A AC nominal Shunt
RS-232 Internal
or
External
Split Core
Current TR-100 Series
Typically 1 or Transformer TR-2000 Series Fax
5A AC nominal with built-in P&QR Series Machine
Terminating
Resistor

Multi-recorder cross trigger

System status relays Remote Master


Evaluation Station
DC pulse time sync. (TR-100 only)
Portable Master
Optional IRIG-B time code (TR-100 only) Evaluation Station

GPS (TR-2000 only) RS-232


Direct
50/60 Hz line synch (P&QR only) Connection
(optional Ethernet)

4.35
AMETEK
Recorders

4.36
AMETEK
Power Quality

Deregulation means Ametek ACE 4000


increased competition. Fully integrates an industrial grade
Pentium™ PC with a high speed DSP
For even modest sized based power quality analyzer in a
power customers, an portable package.
investment in power
quality monitoring is one Ametek ACE 2000
of the best a company This permanent or portable unit
measures all aspects of power
can make. Ametek consumption and performs the tasks of
Power Instruments over 100 instruments.
offers an array of
accurate, flexible and Ametek ACE Quatro
High resolution cycle-by-cycle power
easy to use power analysis from a smart portable featuring
quality equipment and advanced single & three-phase power
software. quality monitor/recorder and simulta-
neous sampling of 4 voltages, 4
currents.
PQRx
Innovative, comprehensive and Ametek Power Instruments: providing
affordable, the PQRx is a permanently answers about your power consump-
mounted recorder that provides the tion is only the beginning.
information you need to decide exactly
how to buy your power and looks at
key power quality parameters.

AmetekPQSystem
A complete, fully automated system
which uses the power of the internet
for everything from data collection to
comprehensive report generation.

AmetekPQService
Provides continuous monitoring and
analysis and data collection, generates
reports and supplies answers.

DL-8000/DL-9000
Advanced power monitoring systems
based on our fault recorder technology
in portable packages.

Display Station Software


Ametek’s software packages provide
complete control of power quality
monitors and recorders, extensive sets
of data viewing tools and a variety of
communications options for the PQRx,
DL-8000 and DL-9000.

AmetekAiPower
Data monitoring and analysis software
that expertly reads your power quality
recorder data, analyzes it and recom-
mends solutions.

5.1
AMETEK
Power Quality

PQRx
Power Quality
Recorders
Comprehensive Power
Quality Recorders with
Advanced Features
“Check up” on power quality data
with the affordable PQRx Power
Quality Recorder.

Whether you are a utility diagnosing a


power quality problem on the power
grid, or a facilities manager performing
a scheduled check up on power quality
concerns in your plant… the PQRx is
the perfect, affordable remedy you’ve • Ametek Power Instruments
been looking for. PQRx has excellent RFI
rejection, minimizing the
unwanted effects of cell
For Utilities phones, computers,
broadcast, or hand-held
Deregulation means increased compe- radios.
tition for utilities. Providing affordable • You can identify and isolate
power quality affirmation to your key problems using the fault
customers is critical to keep customers recording and waveform
from migrating away, and to win new capture capabilities.
customers. The PQRx offers utilities • The low cost PQRx offers great
incredible flexibility, ease of use, flexibility to the Power Quality
durability, and perhaps most impor- Economic Incentives! professional. For instance, you
tantly, dramatic cost savings! can take advantage of its
One of the biggest reasons to buy your multiple-voltage ranges and
new PQRx is purely economic! We’ve selectable CT scaling to obtain
For Customers packed many high end recording improved accuracy by optimizing
functions into a well built unit that is your A to D measurement.
For even modest sized power custom- offered at a very low cost. The PQRx • Best of all, these units have
ers, doing business in this newly has many of the functions that you optional internet connectivity so
deregulated environment, a power quality would expect in a power quality you can get the data you need
monitor is one of the best investments recorder. However, we would like to without having to leave your
your company can make! Why just spot point out many features that are rare chair.
check? The PQRx is an affordable for a unit at this price, and even some • The dynamic Ametek PQSystem
monitor which allows continous monitor- features that are not available on other software will quickly and easily
ing, reducing and even eliminating the units at any price! help you get the most out of your
odds of missing a PQ event. Further, you PQRx. A more complete
collect important trend information, which • First, this Power Quality Recorder explanation of PQSystem LE
indicates if problems are getting worse, has enormous data storage software follows.
better, or are just a one-time anomaly. capacity. It comes with a • Check out the Technical
Your power quality monitor will help you standard 6 gigs of storage. This Specifications chart to see all the
take a survey of sufficient length to gives you plenty of flexibility for terrific features offered by the
provide the information you need to long measurement surveys, or PQRx.
decide exactly how to best buy your short highly concentrated data
power: spot, flat rate, time of use, collection. Whether it’s avoiding a costly plant
seasonal. Your PQRx can easily pay for • The units are phase locked shut down, finding power quality
itself in a short period of time. Providing looped to offer you extraordinary problems or just making sure that you
answers about your power consumption sampling accuracy even if the are paying the lowest possible price for
is only the beginning, many additional frequency you are monitoring your electricity usage… the Ametek
benefits are yours with an PQRx from shifts. Most competitive products Power Instruments PQRx is the right
Ametek Power Instruments. don’t have this capability. prescription for you!

5.2
PQRx Features
• 8 channel input:
4 voltage, 4 current
• 14 bit recording
• 8 Mbytes internal memory
• 6.4 Gbytes hard disk
• Sample rate 128/cycle
• Relay input
• Real time clock
• Measures waveform faults
• Measures voltage dips and
surges
• Measures harmonics
• Measures flicker and imbalance
• Records voltage and current,
frequency, and real power
• Computes demand, phase angle,
power factor, and sequence
components at PC
• Event triggering accuracy is
better than 1%
• RS232 serial port
• Internal modem option available
• Ethernet network option available
• Free phone support
• Ametek PQ System software

PQRx Benefits
• Provides complete range of
power quality events
• Simple to use
• Determine the lowest possible
price for power
• Pays for itself in savings
• Large memory capacity allows for PQSystem Software Automation
long surveys or short • Automated data collection and
concentrated data collection Automated data gathering and compre- analysis
• Permits longer survey periods hensive report generation for the PQRx • Automatically generated reports
than traditional power quality are provided by the PQSystem software.
studies This software uses the power of the Warning System
• Extraordinary sampling accuracy internet to provide instant analysis and • Avoid power quality problems
• RFI rejection minimizes the solutions to reduce downtime, prevent with continuous analysis and
effects of outside interference equipment damage and monitor energy trend information
• Isolates problems with waveform costs. • Identify problems before damage
recording occurs
• Optimizes A to D measurements Answers, not just data
• Optional internet transports data • Instant, automated analysis and Open Architecture
to you solutions • No compatibility limitations
• Enclosed unit can be used • Continuous review and • Interfaces with most monitors
outdoors interpretation of data • Stores data in ODBC compliant
• Low maintenance • Reduces downtime from PQ database
• Artificial intelligence in software problems
provides answers and solutions, • Manages energy costs
not just data Auto-call and paging
• Unique to PQSystem and PQRx,
The power of the web the recorder auto-transfers data to
• Easy access to analysis reports a PC and the PC pages appropriate
• Download reports to your word personnel for near instantaneous
processor notification of problems

5.3
AMETEK
Power Quality
RiS PQRx TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INPUTS REAL TIME CLOCK
No. of channels 8 (4 voltage, 4 current) Clock source 32,768 Hz. crystal oscillator
consult factory for other configurations Resolution 1 ms.
Voltage inputs (options) 150 V RMS maximum Range Time and date (including leap year
300 V RMS maximum and day of the year).
600 V RMS maximum
Synchronization 50/60 Hz from voltage input
Star (wye) or delta connections
Current inputs (options) 1/5A RMS nominal
100/200/500/1000 A RMS nominal
COMMUNICATIONS
(1.4V fsd. Int. or ext. burden) Serial port RS232 type.
Designed to record to 40% overrange Speed up to 57 kBaud
Frequency response 40Hz – 3kHz. (+0dB, -3dB for voltages) Modem (standard) Hayes compatible type internal.
DC – 3kHz (+0dB for currents) (up to 57.6 kBaud)
Accuracy Better than 0.2% of full scale Network (option) TCP/IP 10Base2 or 10BaseT

RECORDING VOLTAGE WITHSTAND


Recording resolution 14 bits. Isolation Channel to channel (voltage)
Recording accuracy +/- 1 lsb. Channel to ground.
2 kV RMS for 1 minute
Sample rate 128 samples per cycle
(as per IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-5)
6.4/7.68k samples per second
2 samples per cycle for high-speed Impulse voltage withstand Channel to channel (voltage)
RMS envelope capture Channel to ground
5 kV, 1.2/50 ms. 0.5 Joule
(as per IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-5)
DATA STORAGE
Electrical fast transient (EFT) 4 kV, 5/50 ns. 15 ms burst length
Internal memory 8 Mbytes
non-maloperate (as per
Hard disk 6.4 Gbytes (minimum) IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-22-1)
Surge withstand (SWC) 2.5 kV, 1 MHz HF burst disturbance
RECORDED DATA non-maloperate (as per
Waveform Capture 4 cycles pre, 12 cycles post IEEE C37.90-1987 IEC 255-22-1)
Option for up to 2 seconds RFI immunity 10 V/m 20 MHz – 1 GHz (80% AM
Up to 1 minute of RMS data @ 1 kHz). Non – maloperate (as per
Trending – 16 weeks Voltages: 1 minute min/max/avg IEEE C37.90-1987 BS EN 50082)
Currents: 1 minute min/max/avg RFI emission — radiated 40 dB mV/m (27 – 130 MHz)
Frequency: 1 minute min/max/avg 47 dB mV/m (130 MHz – 1 GHz)
Watts: 1 minute min/max/avg EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Harmonics: 10 minute (as per BS EN 50081-1)
min/max/avg/angle
— conducted (150 kHz – 30 Mhz)
to the 50th harmonic
EN 55022B (class ‘B’ limits)
Imbalance: 10 minute min/max/avg
Flicker: 10 minute Pst — harmonics (100 Hz – 30 MHz)
(as per IEC 555 class ‘A’ limits)
Metered values kVAh
±kWh Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 8 kV contact, 15 kV radiated
±kVArh discharge. Non-maloperate
(as per IEC 801-2)
EVENT TRIGGERING
Trigger parameters Over/under level with hysteresis.
ENCLOSURE
ROC & THD Mounting Wall
Accuracy Better than 1% Size 300 x 400 x 210 mm
(11.75 x 16 x 8.25)
Pre-fault time 4 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc);
1-10 sec. (2 samp/cyc) Weight 8 Kg. (13.2lbs.)
Post-fault time 12 cycles (128 or 256 samp/cyc);
1-59 sec. (2 samp/cyc) ENVIRONMENT
External trigger Relay contact Operating temperature -10 to 50 °C 14 to 122 °F
Storage temperature -40 to 70 °C -40 to 158 °F
POWER SUPPLY Humidity 5 – 95% RH (non condensing)
Input voltage range 88–300V dc, 85–264V ac, 50/60Hz
24 or 48Vdc optional
Power requirement 20 VA
Battery Optional 12V for recorder operation

5.4
AmetekPQSystem AmetekPQSystem is a complete
web-based system which includes:
• Analyzes and uploads trend
analysis to the web
Total Monitoring/ • Power quality monitors • Reduces downtime and equipment
• A communications system for damage from power quality
Analysis Solution collecting data from customer/ problems and manages energy costs
remote sites
Automated Data • A power family of fully integrated The power of the web
software applications. Your • Easy access to the analysis
Gathering and Report Ametek Sitemaster includes reports on the Internet
Delivery using the power Ametek Alarm, Ametek Pager, • Personal password-protected
of the internet Ametek Report Generator, web pages for customer
Ametek Ai Browser, • Customers can view their most
Given the greater range of energy Communications and Drivers recent power quality report,
choices and the complexity of diagnos- • Database, data graphing and download the report to their word
ing power quality problems, a utility- charting tools processor, view their energy and
operated power monitoring and • Analysis and reporting software demand trends (as well as other
analysis service is essential. • Paging and warning functions measurement parameters
• Web-based reporting including harmonics)
AmetekPQSystem allows energy • Can include installation and
training by Ametek technicians
providers to supply their customers The power of automation
with analysis services at a fraction of • Create a list of the jobs you want
the cost of a conventional power done, and the timing, then
monitoring and analysis system. For Total Solution for Utilities AmetekPQSystem does the rest.
commercial or industrial customers, a From trending harmonics to
smaller scale, fully automated monitor- • Provides a total solution for producing a complete power
ing and analysis system is available. utilities to serve customers quality analysis report,
• Competitive advantage in today’s AmetekPQSystem makes your life
deregulated market simple
• Proof of performance for quality • Automated data collection and
delivered automated data analysis
• Automatically generates reports
and makes them available to you
Total Solution for and/or your customers
Large Users
Power warning system
• Establish a reasonable cost of • Optional activation of a pager
power quality when a harmful power quality
• Monitor quality of incoming event is detected
power • Complete analysis of problem is
• Identify sources of power quality available on the customer’s
problems password-protected web page
• Provide solutions • Avoid power quality problems
Own your own complete with the continuous analysis and
trend information
custom Power Quality • Identify problems before downtime
System sized to your needs Benefits
• Provides answers, not just data or equipment damage occurs
and gain an edge in today’s with instant, automated analysis
deregulated market and solutions based on
sophisticated artificial intelligence
Utilities, multi-facility, single-point facility technologies
and large customers can own a com- • Continuously reviews data and
plete system and capitalize on today’s employs expert embedded
deregulated market. This complete reasoning to interpret information
system is fully automated — from data and generate executive analysis
collection to comprehensive reports. reports
AmetekPQSystem uses the power of the • Determines the severity of a
internet to deliver information where it is problem and its origin, along with
needed most. AmetekPQSystem is a a generally accepted solution to
complete turnkey package which the problem
includes installation and training by • Reports are output in word
Ametek engineers. processing format for ease of editing

5.5
AMETEK
Power Quality
The power of open
architecture
• A true open architecture system
without compatibility limitations
• Interfaces with many different
power monitors
• Ametek is committed to
developing communications
drivers for new monitors as they
are introduced into the market
• Choose the monitoring hardware
that best suits your needs
• Stores data in an ODBC Customers can view energy and demand on their web site.
compliant database with a
published schema
• Use widely available commercial
applications like EXCEL, or
AmetekPQSystem’s easy-to-learn
universal data viewing and
graphing software,
AmetekAi•Browser™
• AmetekAi•Browser™ includes all
of the charts you want, including
CBEMA, as well as time plots,
phasors, and harmonic distribution,
plot data from different
monitoring equipment all in the
same chart View and download measurement data in an
ODBC compliant database.

Why AmetekPQSystem?

Issue In-house PQSystem


Power Quality Monitoring for Customers Capital & Labor Intensive Affordable
Use of Customer’s Existing PQ Monitors Seldom Yes, many models supported
On-Staff Engineer Trained in Power Quality Analysis Highly Advised Optional
Outside Consultants to advise beyond basic PQ matters Often Required Never Required
Round the Clock Customer PQ Monitoring Capital & Labor Intensive Automated & Affordable
Data Collection Manual Automated
PQ Problem Analysis After the fact Instantly
PQ Problem Identification from Data Time intensive Automatic Expert System
Notification of Problem Often panic shut down Instantly
Off-premises Notification of PQ Problem Not likely Internet, optional pager
Reports Time Consuming Automated & Simple
Multiple Site Monitoring Difficult & Expensive Simple common database
Keep Customer’s monthly costs low Seldom Always
Information available 24 hours a day Unlikely Yes, on customer web page

5.6
AmetekPQService PQ Warning System
• optional service activates a pager
Affordable Power when a harmful power quality
event is detected
Quality Service • generates a new PQ report for
Over The Net analysis and answers
• continuous analysis and trend
information identifies problems
Automated power quality before your company experiences
service is now available a loss
for one low monthly fee...
with no capital
investment Put the Power of the Web
to Work for You
Getting the answers that you need with • easy access to and viewing of
AmetekPQService is simple. You do reports via the Internet
not need to select, purchase, operate • personal web pages are
and maintain power monitoring Here’s How It Works… password protected and can be
hardware and software. Everything is viewed with a standard browser
included. One monthly fee covers it all. 1. You get power power quality • reports and raw data
Continuous monitoring and analysis monitors installed and tested measurements can be
means that AmetekPQService is there downloaded to your PC
whenever you need it, collecting data, 2. You get data monitored at
generating reports and supplying frequent intervals
answers. Cash in on Deregulation
3. You get written reports with clear
• AmetekPQService provides
answers
energy consumption profiles that
Just buy the answers 4. You get instant internet reports,
help match your facility with the
and reduce your cost of best Energy Service Provider
answers anywhere, anytime
• AmetekPQService monitoring
power quality! ensures that your facility receives
5. You get cost saving demand and
acceptable levels of power
AmetekPQService is a comprehensive energy reports
quality at all times
service which provides commercial and • if power quality is compromised
industrial facilities with continuous 6. You get prompt problem and
AmetekPQService determines if
monitoring and analysis of their power alarm notification
the problem is in-house or with
systems. Reports are generated your ESP
around the clock and automatically 7. You Get Measurement Data: View
• disputes with your ESP can be
posted on your personal web page in and download raw measurement
quickly resolved
an easy-to-read format, making data in an ODBC compliant
information available for review at any database
time. AmetekPQService is there
whenever you need it. Professional Reports
AmetekPQService is simple. You do Simple Power Management • complete reports with color
not need to select, purchase, operate • web-based automated remote charts and graphs make
and maintain power monitoring analysis identifying problems easy
hardware and software. One monthly • includes a power quality monitor, • record power disturbances,
fee covers it all. Ametek offers an installation, monthly executive severity, and cause
optional service which activates a report and a password protected • record origination (whether within
pager when the system detects a web page your facility or from the
harmful power quality event. Other distribution grid), equipment
service options are available, and affected and possible solutions
Ametek Power Instruments can provide • separate reports are generated
custom support as needed. Around The Clock Analysis for each monitoring device
• continuous monitoring of power • energy reports chart usage,
system demand, and peak billing
• generates easy-to-read parameters
professional reports • track and analyze harmonics,
• supplies answers, not just data peak loading and other
• reduces need for outside parameters
consultants • verify IEC, ANSI and IEEE
compliance

5.7
AMETEK
Power Quality
AmetekPQService is a
complete system
which includes:
• power monitors
• a communications system for
collecting data from customer/
remote sites
• database, data graphing and
charting tools
• analysis and reporting software
• paging and warning functions
• web-based reporting

Why Is AmetekPQService Better?

Issue In-house PQService


Purchase Of Expensive PQ Data Collection Device(s) Yes No
Use Your Existing Monitors Yes Yes (most units supported)
On-Staff Engineer Trained In Power Quality Analysis Highly Advised Optional
Outside Consultants To Advise Basic PQ Matters Often Required Not Required
Round The Clock Monitoring Seldom Always
Data Collection Usually manual Automated
Prompt PQ Problem Analysis After The Fact Instantly
PQ Problem Identification from Data Time Intensive Automatic Expert System
Notification of Problem Often Shut Down Often Averts Shut Down
Off-premises Notification of PQ Problem Not Likely Internet and Optional Page
Reports Time Consuming Automated & Simple
Multiple Site Monitoring Difficult, Expensive Simple Common Database
Low monthly costs Seldom Always
Money Saving Power Usage & Demand Information Unavailable Yes. Often Pays For Itself

5.8
AMETEK
Power Quality

DL-8000 and
DL-9000 Portable
Power Quality
Monitors
The DL-8000 and DL-9000
Power Quality Monitors
are advanced power
monitoring systems in a
rugged portable package.

The DL-8000 and DL-9000 portable


systems are equipped to support a
range of measurement transducers
and connection options providing an The DL-8000 portable has been
attractive and flexible monitoring designed to be easily installed on-site,
system for the power utility, vastly reducing any commissioning
commercial and industrial user. time. The system includes optional
push-fit (shrouded) protective rear
An extensive suite of Windows™ based panel connections to analog and digital
software is available with the portable measurement points using fused jaw-
system for local (laptop PC) or remote clips and non-invasive CT clamps.
setup, data retrieval, analysis and
reporting via modem or network
communications.

Data For:

• Motor Starts
• Relay, Fuse and recloser
coordination and misoperation
studies
• Load Balancing
• Harmonic magnitudes
• Co-gen plant monitoring
• Motor control center monitoring
• Sags and Swells
• Steady-State Voltage Compliance
• Surges and transient changes
• Equipment Sizing
• Data needed for K-Factor
calculations
• Automatic Transfer Switch
testing/monitoring

5.9
AMETEK
Power Quality

Features:
• Rugged Enclosure with Carry
Handle
• Fault Recording using a Wide
Range of Programmable Triggers
• Power Quality Event Capture and
Analysis
• Provides 8 Analog/16 Digital Input
Channels or optional 16 Analog/
32 Digital Input Channels
• Uses a Range of CT Clamps
for Non-Invasive Connection
• Supports ∆–Y (3 or 4 wire) VT
Connections
• Extensive Windows™ based
Applications Software
• Universal AC/DC Supply
• Logged Recording of Voltage, Harmonics Logging Comparing Same
Current, Harmonics and Location at 2 Different Days
Frequency using Integral Hard
Disk

Options:
• Cellular Modem for Remote
Communications
• Ethernet Card for Network
Support
• Push-fit Rear Panel Connectors
and Test Leads for Simple
Installation
• Voltage Divider box for 600, 480
and 277V Systems
• CT Interface Unit supporting a
Wide Range of CT Ratios

Waveform Capture (simultaneous on up to


16 analog and 32 digital inputs)

5.10
Voltage Fault Propagation Comparing
Voltage Dip Severity at Different Power
System Voltage Levels

Voltage Dip Profiles for Power Quality


Assessment Comparing 2 Sites Over Same
Time Interval

5.11
AMETEK
Power Quality
DL8000
Portable Power Quality Monitor
• 8 or 16 Analog Channels Features
(CONTINUED)
The DL-8000 Series brings to the
• 16 or 32 Digital Channels ■ 486 industrial grade CPU
market a Power Quality Recording • Simple-to-Service Plug-in
System with unparalleled levels of ■ Downloadable firmware
Circuit Card Design
flexibility, while providing the user with
the worlds most user friendly • Substation Environment ■ Internal hard disk drive
software available today. Qualified
■ Up to 192 samples per cycle
Two portable units are available with up • Extensive, Flexible Remote- sample rate
to 16 analog/32 digital input channels Controlled Triggering
on the DL-8000. The DL-8000 will ■ Real time graphical display and
• Full 12-Bit A/D With numeric measurement for easy
operate as a stand-alone system or link Simultaneous Sampling
to a PC-based Master Station. In terms and accurate trigger level setting
of performance, the system has a • DC Coupling Standard
sample rate of up to 192 samples per ■ Software triggers available
cycle, with a vast selection of standard • Standard ISA Bus simultaneously
triggers simultaneously available on Architecture For Easy • Under limit violation with
each channel or on a system basis to Upgrades adjustable hysteresis per input
initiate wareform capture. These (real time display/
include over and under limit violation • Simple Point-And-Click
Windows Interface measurement available)
with adjustable hysteresis, rate of
change, zero and negative sequence, • Over limit violation with
• Full Context-Sensitive Help adjustable hysteresis per input
sub-cycle drop out (sinewave quality)
and frequency. • Waveforms Displayed At (real time display/
Highest Resolution Possible measurement available)
The high speed, high resolution On Your Monitor • Rate of change trigger per
recording and flexible triggering modes input
make the Ametek DL-8000 ideal for • Fault, Trend, Harmonic,
capturing all forms of power quality and Flicker Recording • Sub-cycle drop out (sinewave
from sags, swells and lightning strikes Simultaneously distortion) trigger per input
to spikes and sub-cycle distortion. It • Negative sequence component
• Optimize Switchgear
can be used for verifying protection/
Maintenance (real time display/
breaker operation as well as many
measurement available)
types of power quality monitoring. • Long-Term Load Data For
Planning • Zero sequence component
The DL-8000’s unique dynamic post (real time display/
fault length optimizes data memory • Harmonic Recording measurement available)
usage by terminating the recording of a
problem once a steady state has • Voltage Quality Monitoring • Over, Under and Rate-of-
returned for a predefined period. Short Change of Frequency (1 per
• Windows™ Based Graphical chassis)
faults generate short records while a User Interface (GUI) For
longer fault will cause the Ease Of Use • Digital Inputs; level, or edge
fault recording period to be extended with selectable return-to-
normal triggering
Local parameter setting and record
transfer is performed simply by ■ DC pulse or optional IRIG-B (time
plugging in a portable computer code) time synchronization
running Ametek’s Windows™ based
software into the port on the front
panel of the DL-8000. One computer
can be used for many DL-8000’s,
thereby reducing costs and making the
parameter and fault record data more
secure.

5.12
Architecture

Typically 69 or
120 VAC nominal
(277, 480, 600V optional) Centronics

Power Quality Recorder


Local Modem
Spring loaded
CT connected CT RS-232 Internal
Sealing or
to secondary or Box External Fax
load level (optional)
currents

DL-8000 and DL-9000

System status relays


Remote Master
DC pulse time sync. Evaluation Station
(DL-8000)

Optional IRIG-B time code Portable Master


(DL-8000) Evaluation Station

GPS Antenna (DL-9000)


RS-232
Direct
Connection
(optional Ethernet)

5.13
AMETEK
Power Quality
DL-8000 inputs are wired in properly (see next to check for new records (Auto Poll). A
page). Two phase groups are available communications log records any
Power Quality Monitor per 8 inputs. problems incurred during auto polling.

Communications, The DL-8000 can be set to dial up the Unauthorized parameter updates and
Master Station when a fault is recorded record downloading can be protected
Analysis and (Auto Call) and the Master Station can by passwords. A DL-8000 may be
be programmed to contact each remotely triggered from the Master
System recorder in a region at regular intervals Station to generate test records.
Configuration
Printing of Fault Records
Software HEADER
Fault records may be printed
Ametek’s software programs provide
TR-100
DL-8000 locally by the DL-8000 as shown
TRANSIENT RECORDER
in the sample on the left, or
advanced data analysis, remotely at the Master Station
communication and configuration Location
Machine Name
:
:
Dartford
Demo 1 using Ametek Analysis software.
functions in a 486 PC-compatible Recorder Number : 2
Every record has the location of
Trigger : Analogue under on channel 1 'VRed'
(minimum) computer. The programs Trigger time : 14 Aug 1995 11:42:50.481 the DL-8000, the time and date
have a very flexible graphical user Analogue channels
of the record and the source of
interface which uses Windows 95™, Channel Definition Triggering the trigger.
Channel Nominal F.S.D Units Over Under SubC ROC
Windows 98™, NT™, or 2000™. 1 VRed 132.2 176.2 kV 98%, 0% CONFIGURATION
2 VYellow 132.2 176.2 kV 98%, 0%
Many fault analysis features are 3
4 -
VBlue 132.2
0.0
176.2
0.0
kV 98%, 0%
The names, scales and trigger
provided and there are optional 5
6
7
IRed
IYellow
IBlue
700.0
700.0
700.0
14000.0
14000.0
14000.0
A
A
A
levels of each analog and digital
programs for additional mathematical 8 INeutral 700.0 14000.0 A 110%, 0%
channel are shown next.
functions. There are two major Phase Groups
PHASE GROUP
modules of Ametek software available. Phase Group Definition Triggering

Channels Zero seq. Neg. seq.


CONFIGURATION
1 1,2,3 Phase group 1
2 4,5,6 Phase group 2 Two phase groups are available
Communications per every 8 inputs.
Digital Channels

Channel Definition Triggering


This provides communication to, and Channel Normal Profile

configuration of, the DL-8000 series 1 Digital 1


2 Digital 2
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
3 Digital 3 Open Yes Edge
either (1) remotely via a modem link to 4 Digital 4
5 Digital 5
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
6 Digital 6 Open Yes Edge
a Master Station normally located in 7 Digital 7
8 Digital 8
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Edge
Edge
9 Digital 9 Open Yes
central engineering or at a control 10 Digital 10
11 Digital 11
Open
Open
Yes
Yes

center, (2) locally via a direct 12 Digital 12


13 Digital 13
14 Digital 14
Open
Open
Open
Yes
Yes
Yes

connection on site or (3) via an 15 Cross Trigger


16 Digital 16
Open
Open
No
Yes

Ethernet link. Digital debounce : 10 ms

Fault profile
The communications software has a Fault Level - RMS

unique feature that allows the user to Analogue Channel Pre-fault Immediate Final Post-clearance Units
RECORD PROFILE
1 VRed 132.1 127.6 105.4 132.5 kV The configuration is followed by a
set over and/or under trigger levels with 2 VYellow 132.7 132.0 132.0 132.0 kV
3
4 -
VBlue 132.8
0.0
132.1
0.0
131.8
0.0
132.1
0.0
kV
profile of the record with actual
hysteresis on the analog channels with 5
6
IRed
IYellow
710.9
704.1
1401.4
697.3
2802.7
697.3
690.4
717.8
-
A
A signal levels, durations and digital
the actual signal displayed in near real 7
8
IBlue
INeutral
704.1
0.0
690.4
1045.9
710.9
2795.9
697.3
0.0
A
A
transition times measured from
time. This waveform is overlaid with the Digital Transitions
the data.
equivalent trigger levels which improves Digital Channel

1 Digital 1
State

Alarm
Time (ms)

the ease and accuracy to trigger 2 Digital 2 Normal 46

settings (see next page).


Fault Duration : 70 ms Time markers: 10 ms
8

Sub cycle drop out triggering measures GRAPHICAL PLOT


the quality of a voltage or current The analog and digital inputs are
waveform. Small perturbations which then displayed in graphical form
would not be detected by standard with horizontal lines indicating the
start and end of the trigger
level or rate of change triggering can
16
15

14
13

12
11

10
9

8
7

6
5

4
3

2
1

condition.
be recorded by the DL-8000.

Sets of three analog channels can be


defined as phase groups. For each
group, zero and negative sequence
component trigger levels can be set.
Again, the display of near real time data
ensures correct values are used and

5.14
Master Station Software File Features:
After retrieving the necessary fault • Full support of the Comtrade file
records using the communications format
software, the analysis package allows
the Master Station to display fault
records, analyze them and print to any
Windows™ supported printer. Display Features:
This analysis software provides a • Add, remove or rearrange
complete set of functions for complete Analog Trigger Settings Window, where the
Real Time Values for each Voltage and waveforms on screen
power system fault analysis with built in Current Input can be read. • Place waveform cursor to read
tools to simplify the setup of displays time and amplitude
and printer functions. The user • Select channels and time range
interface follows the recommended for display, printing or
Windows conventions and gives modification of display
several options to manipulate wave- parameters
forms through keyboard and/or mouse • Dynamic scaling of waveforms
operation.

Analysis Features:

• Reports channel that triggered


each fault record
• Instant graphic measurements of
time and amplitude differences
between two points on screen

Main Operating Parameters are set up from


this window.
Printing Features:
• Works with nearly all Windows™
supported printers
• High-resolution color printing

Zero and Negative Sequence Component


Trigger Settings Window, where three
channels make up a Phase Group. The Real
Time Sequence Components are displayed.
Color coding allows user to verify proper
channel selection and wiring.

5.15
AMETEK
Power Quality
Expert System Software

The suite of Expert System Software


consists of three separate packages
that are linked together by a shared
database created by the user in the
Automated Analysis portion of the
software.
Automated Analysis Results
The three packages are the Automated
Analysis, Voltage Dip Analysis, and Above is a sample of the automated
Breaker Performance Monitor. To analysis results obtained automatically
create a variety of plots from the during Auto-poll or Auto-call. This text
harmonic trend data recorded by a DL- Basic Substation Configuration can be viewed without having to open
8000, the Harmonix software program and view the waveform data. The full
is used.